03 Component Installation Manual

Signature Series Component Installation

Manual

P/N 270497 • Rev 2.1 • 16DEC04

DEVELOPED BY Edwards Systems Technology 8985 Town Center Parkway Bradenton, FL 34202 (941) 739-4300

COPYRIGHT NOTICE Copyright © 2004 Edwards Systems Technology

This manual and the products it describes are copyrighted by Edwards Systems Technology (EST). You may not reproduce, translate, transcribe, or transmit any part of this manual without express, written permission from EST.

This manual contains proprietary information intended for distribution to authorized persons or companies for the sole purpose of conducting business with Edwards Systems Technology, Inc. If you distribute any information contained in this manual to unauthorized persons, you have violated all distributor agreements and we may take legal action.

CREDITS This manual was designed and written by EST Technical Services - Documentation Department, Sarasota.

Signature Series Component Installation Manual i

Content

Audible Detector Base SIGA-270(L) - Fire Alarm Stations SIGA-270P - 2-Stage Fire Alarm Station SIGA-278 - Double Action Fire Alarm Station SIGA-AA30 and SIGA-AA50 - Audio Amplifiers SIGA-AB4 - Audible Detector Base SIGA-APS (-220) - Auxiliary Power Supply Module SIGA-CC1 - Single Input Signal Module SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module SIGA-CC2 - Dual Input Signal Module SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module SIGA-CRR - Polarity Reversal Relay SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module SIGA-CT1I - Single Input Module SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module SIGA-CT2I - Dual Input Module SIGA-DG and SIGA-DGMF - Detector Guard with Optional Mounting Flange SIGA-DGS - Surface Adapter for use with the SIGA-DG Detector Guard SIGA-DGSA - Surface Adapter SIGA-DGSB - Detector Guard Surface Box SIGA-DH - Duct Detector Housing Assembly SIGA-DMP - Duct Detector Mounting Plate SIGA-DTS - Duct Detector Test Station SIGA-HFS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector SIGA-HRS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector SIGA-HRSI - Intelligent Grade 1 Heat Detector SIGA-IB - Detector Base SIGA-IB4 - Detector Base SIGA-IM - Isolator Module SIGA-IO - Input-Output Module SIGA-IPHS(B) - Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector SIGA-IPHSI - Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector SIGA-IS - Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector SIGA-ISI - Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector SIGA-LED - Remote LED Alarm Indicator SIGA-MAB - Class A-B Input-Output Module SIGA-MB4 - Transponder Mounting Bracket SIGA-MCC1 - Single Input Signal Module SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-sync Output Module SIGA-MCC2 - Dual Input Signal Module SIGA-MCR - Control Relay SIGA-MCRR - Control Reversing Relay Module SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector SIGA-MDM - Signature Digital Message Module

ii Signature Series Component Installation Manual

SIGA-MIO - Input-Output Module SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module SIGA-MP1 - Mounting Plate SIGA-MP2 - Mounting Plate SIGA-MP2L - Mounting Plate SIGA-MRM1 - Riser Monitor Module SIGA-PHS - Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector SIGA-PHSI - Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector SIGA-PS - Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector SIGA-PSI - Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector SIGA-RB - Detector Base SIGA-RB4 - Detector Base SIGA-RM1 - Riser Monitor Module SIGA-SB - Detector Base SIGA-SB4 - Detector Base SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module SIGA-TS - 4 Inch Box Trim Skirt-Ring SIGA-TS4 - Trim Skirt-Ring SIGA-TSB - Four Inch Box Trim Skirt-Ring SIGA-UIO2R - Universal Input-Output Motherboard SIGA-UIO6(R) - Universal Input-Output Motherboard SIGA-UM - Universal Class A-B Module SIGA-WTM - Waterflow-Tamper Module SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station SIGI-IBS - Detector Base

Signature Series Component Installation Manual iii

Important Information

Limitation of liability The products described in this manual have been designed to meet the requirements of NFPA Standard 72; Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard 864; and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada, Inc., Standard ULC S527. Installation in accordance with this manual, applicable codes, and the instructions of the authority having jurisdiction is mandatory. EST shall not under any circumstances be liable for any incidental or consequential damages arising from loss of property or other damages or losses owing to the failure of EST products beyond the cost of repair or replacement of any defective products. EST reserves the right to make product improvements and change product specifications at any time.

While every precaution has been taken during the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents, EST assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.

FCC warning This equipment can generate and radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed in accordance with this manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for Class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These rules are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when this equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment is likely to cause interference, in which case the user at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.

iv Signature Series Component Installation Manual

Document history

Revision Date Reason For Change

1.0 12FEB97 Initial Release

2.0 06DEC99 Added the following installation sheets to the manual: AB4, CRR, MAB, MCR, MCRR, MCC1, MCC2, MCT2, UIO2, and UIO6(R). Removed SIGA-RB Sounder Base.

3.0 16DEC04 Added the following installation sheets: Audible Detector Base, SIGA-AA30 and SIGA-AA50, SIGA-AB4, SIGA-APS (-220), SIGA-CC1S, SIGA-CT1I, SIGA-CT2I, SIGA-DGSA, SIGA-DGSB, SIGA-IO, SIGA-IPHSI, SIGA-ISI, SIGA-MCC1S, SIGA-MD(S), SIGA-MDM, SIGA-MIO, SIGA-MRM1, SIGA-PHSI, SIGA-PSI, SIGA-RM1, SIGA-SEC2, SIGA-TS4, SIGA-TSB. Removed the following installation sheets: 2-CTM, SIGA-MCT2.

Installation Sheet 19NOV03 P/N: 3100672 REV: 2.0 Audible Detector Base 1 / 4

Audible Detector Base

Product description

The Audible Detector Base is designed to add an audible output function to any Signature Series detector. The base can operate as an independent local alarm, or as part of a zone or system alarm with synchronized audible output.

This installation sheet applies to Audible Detector Base units with model numbers GSA-AB4G and SIGA-AB4G.

The Audible Detector Base output is field-configurable for output tone (steady or temporal) and output volume (low dBA or high dBA).

Depending on the system supporting the Signature loop, the base can operate as follows:

• It can follow the state of the device it supports • It can be configured (in the SDU) for other operating modes • It can be controlled by program rules you write

The base uses the same address and programming label as the detector it supports.

Specifications Operating voltage: Regulated 16 to 33 Vdc, 16 to 33 Vfwr

This device was tested to the regulated 24 Vdc/fwr operating voltage limits of 16 V and 33 V. Do not apply 80% and 110% of these values for system operation.

Operating current: See Table 1 Supervisory current: DC = 10 mA, FWR = 15 mA Default settings

Output volume: High dBA Output tone: Temporal pattern

Sound level output: See Table 2 Temporal pattern: 0.5 s on, 0.5 s off, 0.5 s on, 0.5 s off, 0.5 s

on, 1.5 s off, repeat cycle Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C). Not all

detectors are rated for this range. Refer to the installation sheet for the specific detector used with the base.

Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH

Wire size: 12 to 18 AWG (2.50 to 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and 18 AWG are preferred.

Compatible detectors: All Signature Series detectors Compatible electrical boxes

AB4G-SB Surface Box for Audible Base North American 2-1/8 in (54 mm) deep 4-inch square box North American 4 by 4 inch octagonal ring (mud box) Standard European 100 mm square box

Agency listings: Meets or exceeds requirements specified in UL 268, UL 464, and ULC-S525

Base diameter: 6.8 in (173 mm) Base height from box: 0.8 in (21 mm) Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mount): 12 in (305 mm) Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C) Table 1: Operating current in mA (RMS)

Voltage Low dBA High dBA

16 Vdc 17 28

24 Vdc 24 41

33 Vdc 31 52

16 Vfwr 41 48

24 Vfwr 51 60

33 Vfwr 60 66

Vdc = Volts direct current, regulated and filtered Vfwr = Volts full wave rectified Table 2: Sound level output (dBA)

Signal Voltage Low dBA High dBA

Reverberant room per UL 464 [1]

Temporal 16 Vdc 71.5 78.1

24 Vdc 75.5 80.7

33 Vdc 78.5 83.1

Steady 16 Vdc 75.5 81.7

24 Vdc 79.5 84.5

33 Vdc 81.8 86.5

Reverberant room per UL 268

Temporal 16 Vdc 77.5 84.1

24 Vdc 81.5 86.7

33 Vdc 84.5 89.1

Steady 16 Vdc 81.5 87.7

24 Vdc 85.5 90.5

33 Vdc 87.8 92.5

dBA = Decibels, A-weighted [1] For UL 464 applications, low dBA settings are for private mode only

P/N: 3100672 REV: 2.0 19NOV03 Installation Sheet 2 / 4 Audible Detector Base

Installation instructions

Cautions

To avoid accidental damage to the panel, disconnect all power before wiring the unit.

Electrical supervision requires the wire run to be broken at each terminal. Do not loop the signaling circuit field wires around the terminals.

The base must be connected to a continuous voltage whether the output tone is set to steady or temporal.

Refer to Figure 1 when you install the base.

Sleeping rooms: In sleeping areas, the high dBA output and steady tone settings must be used.

AB4G-SB: When using the AB4G-SB box, install a reinforcing plate at every knockout you use. (Reinforcing plates are included with the box.) Remove the knockout first, then slide the reinforcing plate into the plastic housing. After the plate is in place, install the conduit connector and nut. See Figure 2.

To install the sounder base:

1. The unit default is for high dBA output. To set the output to low dBA, cut the circuit board trace as marked on the back of the PC board. (See Figure 3.)

2. The unit default is for temporal pattern output. To set the output to steady tone, cut the circuit board trace as marked on the back of the PC board. (See Figure 3.)

3. Select and install a compatible electrical box, and bring the field wiring into the box.

4. Connect the field wiring to the terminals on the back of the base plate. You must observe polarity for the unit to function properly. (See Figure 3.)

5. Attach the base plate to the electrical box.

6. Align the trim ring so that the four tabs on the ring mate with the four slots in the base plate, then press the trim ring onto the base plate until the tabs lock.

7. Attach the desired Signature detector to the base. Align the arrows on the detector and trim ring, press the detector into the base, and rotate the detector until it locks into place.

8. Apply power and activate the unit to verify that it is operating properly.

Figure 1: Installing the Audible Detector Base

Figure 2: Installing reinforcing plates on the AB4G-SB box

Installation Sheet 19NOV03 P/N: 3100672 REV: 2.0 Audible Detector Base 3 / 4

Wiring diagram For additional wiring details, see the applicable control panel installation manual.

SIG+ SIG-DATA-OUT

DATA-IN

DATA+IN/OUT

24 Vdc inFrom power supply or

previous base

Data inFrom Signature controller or

previous device

24 Vdc outTo next base or EOL relay

Data outTo next Signature device

+-

+

-

Volume setting

Default = High volumeCut for low volume

Tone setting

Default = Temporal patternCut for steady tone

+-

+-

To configure output volume or tone, cut the circuit board as

shown.

Figure 3: Output configuration and wiring diagram

Application diagrams

Detector operates the base

In this application the detector operates the base. That is, the base follows the state of the detector, going into and out of alarm with the detector.

The Signature CR module is optional, and is used to silence the bases on the line.

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

AB4G

Data inFrom Signature

controller

-+

24 VdcFrom listed

power supply

+-

Listed EOL relay and

supervising module

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

AB4G

First device Last device

CR

4 3 2 1

8 7 6

Figure 4: Wiring for detector operation of bases

P/N: 3100672 REV: 2.0 19NOV03 Installation Sheet 4 / 4 Audible Detector Base

System turns on all bases

In this application the detector operates the base. In addition, all bases on the line can be activated by system programming that triggers the Signature CRR to reverse supplied polarity.


SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

AB4G


controller

-+

24 VdcFrom listed

power supply

+-


supervising module

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

AB4G


CR

4 3 2 1

8 7 6

CRR

4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5

Figure 5: Wiring for detector and system operation of bases

System turns on bases with synchronization

In this application, all bases on the line are activated by system programming that triggers the Signature CRR module. The bases are synchronized by the G1M-RM for temporal sound.

If the Signature CRR module is not activated, then each detector can still operate its base, but the bases will not be synchronized.



controller

-+

24 VdcFrom listed

power supply

+-

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

AB4G


supervising module

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

AB4G


CR

8 7 6

4 3 2 1

G1M-RM

4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5

CRR

4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5

Figure 6: Wiring for synchronized operation

Construction: Cast zinc with steel backplate

Operation mechanism: Single action, pull lever

Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 Vdc

Standby current: 250 A

Activated current: 400 A

Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)

Operating humidity range: 0 - 93 % RH

Replacement glass rodsUSA, P/N 276-GLR (pkg 20 rods)CAN, P/N 27165 (pkg 12 rods)

Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Compatible electrical boxesNorth American: 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxStandard: 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with 1-gangcover

Special order surface mount boxes27193-10: Cream enamel finish27193-11: Red enamel finish

Shipping weight: 1.2 lbs (0.5 kg)

µ

µ

PRODUCT INFORMATION

WARNINGS

This device will NOT operate without electrical power. As firesfrequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss furthersafeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

SPECIFICATIONS

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

DATE: 02JUN99

INSTALLATION SHEET

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387048P

REVISION LEVEL: 6.0

FILE NAME: 387048P.CDR

CREATED BY: D. Chinell

APPROVED BY: B. Right

Description

Device addressing

LEDs

Mounting

System controller capability

Personality code 1: N/O alarm latching

The Fire Alarm Station, 270 Series, is a component of the SignatureSeries. It is a normally-open, dry contact signal initiating device thatrequires only one action by the user in order to initiate an alarm. Thesingle input module mounted to the back of the unit supervises thestation and sends an alarm signal to the loop controller when theswitch is closed (i.e. when the handle is pulled).

One device address is required. The loop controller assigns anaddress to the station automatically. A custom address can beassigned to the station via laptop computer; no addressing switchesare used.

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the station,when the unit is removed from the electrical box.

Normal: Green LED flashesAlarm/active: Red LED flashes

The terminal blocks will accept AWG 12, 14, 16, or 18 wire (2.5, 1.5,1.0, or 0.75 sq mm ). Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.

The 270 Series requires the Signature Loop Controller.

The 270 Series is factory assigned personality code 1 whichconfigures the station for alarm latching operation. When the pulllever is activated, an alarm signal is sent to the Loop Controller andthe alarm condition is latched at the fire alarm station.

SIGA-270 and SIGA-270LFire Alarm Stations

FIREALARM

FIREALARM

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

LOCALALARMLOCALALARM

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

270 270L

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

6411 Parkland DriveSarasota, FL 34243USA

625 6th Street EastOwen Sound, OntarioCanada N4K 5P8

TM

4 3 2 1

TB1

P/N: 387048P REV: 6.0 PG: 2 / 4

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

WIRING DIAGRAM

Notes

[1] Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for wiringspecifications.

2 All wiring is power-limited and supervised.

REAR VIEWof 270 Series

Factoryconnections:do NOT alter

To next deviceFrom Signature controlleror previous device

Green LED(normal)

Red LED(alarm/active)

DATA OUT (+)

DATA OUT (–)

DATA IN (+)

DATA IN (–)

Wire Stripping Guide

Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of ALL wires that connect tothe terminal block of the module.

Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. Exposingless wire may result in a faulty connection.CAUTION:

1/4 in (~6 mm)

1) The pull station is shipped from the factory complete with a singleinput module attached. The electronic module contains no user-serviceable parts and should NOT be disassembled.

2) Open the pull-station by using a flat blade screwdriver to twist thecover release screw counterclockwise while pulling the coveraway from its backplate.

3) Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and groundfaults.

4) Make all wiring connections as shown in the diagram.

5) Write the address assigned to the pull-station on the labelprovided and apply the label to the pull-station. Peel off theremovable serial number label from the pull-station and apply it tothe appropriate location in the Serial Number Logbook.

6) Using the two 6-32 x 5/8 in (16 mm) machine screws provided,mount the pull-station to the electrical box.

7) Pull the glass rod release lever and install the glass rod throughthe mounting bracket on the front of the pull-station. Set thetoggle switch to the NORMAL position and snap the cover into itslocked position.

Compatible electrical box

LIFT

NORMAL

Toggleswitch

Backplate

Glass rodreleaselever

Cover releasescrew

[1]

INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT

AVERTISSEMENTS

Ce dispositif NE fonctionne PAS en l’absence de courant électrique.Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nousconseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local deprotection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes desécurité supplémentaires.

CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT

FICHE D’INSTALLATION

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF: 387048P

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 6.0

NOM DU FICHIER: 387048P.CDR

APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right

DATE: 02JUN99 CRÉÉ PAR: D. Chinell

Construction: Zinc coulé avec plaque arrière en acier

Mécanisme de fonctionnement: Action unique, tirer la manette

Gamme de tensions de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc

Courant de veille: 250 A

Courant de fonctionnement actif: 400 A

Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)

Gamme d'humidités de fonctionnement: 0 - 93 % HR

Barres en verre de remplacementUSA, réf 276-GLR (paquet de 20 barres)CAN, réf 27165 (paquet de 12 barres)

Gamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)

Boîtes électriques compatiblesAmérique du Nord: Boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2,5 po) deprofondeurStandard: Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de 38 mm(1,5 po) de profondeur avec couvercle simple

Boîtes, montage en saillie, commande spéciale27193-10: Fini émail crème27193-11: Fini émail rouge

Poids à la livraison: 0,5 kg (1,2 livres)

µ

µ

Description

Adressage électronique

Témoins à DEL

Montage

Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système

Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d'alarme n/o

Le poste d'alarme d'incendie, Série 270, est un composant du SérieSignature. C’est un dispositif de déclenchement de signal à contactsec normalement ouvert qui ne requiert qu’une action de la part del'utilisateur pour déclencher une alarme. Le module d'entrée uniquemonté à l'arrière du dispositif surveille le poste et transmet un signald'alarme au contrôleur de boucle quand l'interrupteur est fermé (i.e.quand la manette est tirée).

Une adresse de dispositif est nécessaire. Le contrôleur de boucleassigne une adresse au poste automatiquement. Une adresseparticulière peut être assignée au poste via ordinateur portatif; aucuncommutateur d'adressage n’est utilisé.

Des témoins à DEL de diagnostic fournissent une indication visible del'état du poste, lorsque le dispositif est retiré de la boîte électrique.

Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote.Alarme/actifLe témoin à DEL rouge clignote.

Le Série 270 requiert le contrôleur de boucle Signature.

Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné au 270 série lors de safabrication ce qui configure le poste en mode de verrouillaged'alarme. Quand la manette est tirée, un signal d’alarme est envoyéau contrôleur de boucle et la condition d’alarme est verrouillée auposte d’alarme d’incendie.

Le bornier accepte des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, et de 0,75 mm(AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 16 et 18 AWG sont préférables.

carrés

FIREALARM

FIREALARM

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

LOCALALARMLOCALALARM

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

270 270L

SIGA-270 et SIGA-270LPostes d’alarme d’incendie




TM

P/N: 387048P REV: 6.0 PG: 3 / 4

4 3 2 1

TB1

SCHÉMAS DE CÂBLAGE

Remarques

[1] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucleSignature pour les spécifications de câblage.

2 Tout le câblage est limité en courant et surveillé.

Dénuder l’extrémité de TOUS les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.

Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peutprovoquer un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur unelongueur plus courte peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

ATTENTION:

~6 mm 1/4 po( )

P/N: 387048P REV: 6.0 PG: 4 / 4

MODE D’INSTALLATION

Sortie desdonnées (+)

Sortie desdonnées (–)

Témoin à DELrouge

(alarme/actif)

Connexionsfaites à l’usineNE PAS altérer

Témoin à DELvert (normal)

Vers le dispositif suivant

Dénudage des fils

VUE ARRIÈREdu 270 SÉRIE

Du contrôleur de boucleSignature ou du dispositif

précédent

Entrée desdonnées (+)Entrée des

données (–)

1) Le poste à manette est expédié de l'usine avec un seul moduled'entrée connecté. Le module électronique ne contient aucuncomposant qui puisse être dépanné par l'utilisateur et NE doitPAS être démonté.

2) Ouvrir le poste à manette en utilisant un tournevis à lame platepour tourner la vis de desserrage du couvercle dans le sensinverse des aiguilles d'une montre tout en écartant le couverclede sa plaque arrière.

3) Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défautsde connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.

4) Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.

5) Écrire l'adresse assignée au poste à manette sur l'étiquettefournie et coller cette étiquette sur le poste. Décoller du postel'étiquette de numéro de série et la recoller à l'endroit appropriédans le registre des numéros de série.

6) Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 5/8 po (16 mm) fournies,monter le poste à manette dans la boîte électrique.

7) Tirer le levier de déclenchement de la barre en verre et fairepasser la barre en verre dans le support de montage à l'avant duposte à manette. Positionner l'interrupteur à bascule à la positionNORMALE et pousser le couvercle à enclenchement dans saposition verrouillée.

LIFT

NORMAL

Interrupteurà bascule

Plaquearrière

Boîte électrique compatible

Vis de desserrage ducouvercle

Levier de déclenche-ment de la barreen verre

[1]

PRODUCT INFORMATION

WARNINGS


SPECIFICATIONS

DATE: 02JUN99

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 5.0




Description

Device addressing

LEDs

Mounting

The 2-Stage Fire Alarm Station, 270P, is a component of theSignature Series. The 270P is a normally-open, dry contact, signalinitiating device that requires one action by the user in order to initiatea pre-alarm. A keyswitch is used to activate the general alarm uponverification that evacuation is necessary. (Note: The alarm handlemust be in the position in order to insert the key.) The dualinput module mounted to the back of the unit supervises the station.Input 1 is used to send a pre-alarm signal to the loop controller whenthe switch is closed (i.e. when the handle is pulled). Input 2 of themodule is used to send an alarm signal to the loop controller whenthe keyswitch is activated.

Two device addresses are required. The loop controller assigns twoaddresses to the 270P automatically. Custom addresses can beassigned to the station via laptop computer; no addressing switchesare used.

The 270P may be flush mounted in a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover, or it may be surface mountedusing a special order electrical box. (Refer to the specificationssection of this sheet for ordering information.) The terminal block willaccept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.

Inputs 1 and 2 of the 270P are factory assigned personality code 1.When the keyswitch is activated, an alarm signal is sent to the loopcontroller and the alarm condition is latched at the fire alarm station.

pulled

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the station,when the unit is removed from the electrical box.


The 270P requires the Signature Loop Controller.

System controller capability

Personality Code 1: N/O Alarm Latching (Class B)





Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH

Construction: Cast zinc with steel backplate

Operating mechanism: Single action, pull lever with keyswitch

Shipping Weight: 1.2 lbs (0.5 kg)

Compatible electrical boxesStandard 4 in square box 2-1/8 in (54 mm) deep box with 1-gangcover

Replacement glass rodsUSA, P/N 270-GLR (pkg 20 rods)CAN, P/N 27165 (pkg 12 rods)

Special order surface mount boxes

27193-11: WHD = 3 x 4-3/4 x 2-1/2 in (76 x 121 x 64 mm). Redenamel. Combination 1/2 and 3/4 in knockouts top, bottom, rear.

276B-RSB: WHD = 3-1/2 x 5-1/32 x 2-7/16 in (89 x 128 x 62 mm).Red enamel. Combination 1/2 and 3/4 in knockouts top, bottom,rear.

Wiremold C5744: Buff, cream enamel finish. Combination 1/2 and1 in knockouts top, bottom, rear

µ

µ

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

FIREALARM

FIREALARM

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

SIGA-270P2-Stage Fire Alarm Station




TM

4 3 2 1

TB1

P/N: 387051P REV: 5.0 PG: 2 / 4


WIRING DIAGRAM

Notes



REAR VIEW



Green LED(normal)


DATA OUT (+)

DATA OUT (–)

DATA IN (+)

DATA IN (–)




1/4 in (~6 mm)

1)

2) Open the pull station using a flat blade screwdriver to twist thecover release screw counter-clockwise, while pulling the coveraway from its backplate.


4) Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagram.

5) Write the address assigned to the module on the label providedand apply the label to the module. Peel off the removable serialnumber label from the module and apply it to the appropriatelocation in the Serial Number Logbook.

6)

7) Pull the glass rod release lever and install the glass rod throughthe mounting bracket on the front of the pull station. Push theglass rod release lever into its closed position. Set the toggleswitch to the NORMAL position, and snap the cover into itslocked position.

The 270P is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; itcontains no user-serviceable parts and should NOT bedisassembled.

Using the two 6-32 x 5/8 in (16 mm) machine screws provided,mount the pull-station to the electrical box.

Compatibleelectrical box

Cover releasescrew

LIFT

NORMAL

Toggleswitch

Backplate

Glass rodreleaselever

[1]


AVERTISSEMENTS

Ce dispositif NE fonctionne PAS en l’absence de courant électrique.Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nousconseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local deprotection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes desécurité supplémentaires.

P/N: 387051P REV: 5.0 PG: 3 / 4


SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT











Gamme d'humidités de fonctionnement: 0 - 93 % HR

Construction: Zinc coulé avec plaque arrière en acier

Mécanisme de fonctionnement: Action unique, levier à tirer avecnterrupteur à touche


Boîtes électriques compatiblesBoîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de 54 mm(2-1/8 po) de profondeur avec couvercle simple standard

Barres en verre de remplacement:USA, réf 270-GLR (paquet de 20 barres)CAN, réf 27165 (paquet de 12 barres)

Boîtes montées en saillie, commandées spécialement

27193-11: Finiémail rouge. Combinaison 1,27 cm (1/2 po) et 1,905 cm (3/4 po)débouchures en haut, en bas et à l'arrière.

276B-RSB:Fini émail rouge. Combinaison 1,27 cm (1/2 po) et 1,91 cm (3/4po) débouchures en haut, en bas et à l'arrière.

Wiremold C5744: Poli, fini émail crème. Combinaison 1,27 cm(1/2 po) et 2,54 cm (1 po) débouchures en haut, en bas et àl'arrière.

µ

µ

WHD = 76 x 121 x 64 mm (3 x 4-3/4 x 2-1/2 in).

WHD = 89 x 128 x 62 mm (3-1/2 x 5-1/32 x 2-7/16 in).

Description


Témoins à DEL

Montage


Le poste d’alarme d’incendie à 2 étages, 270P, est un composant duSérie Signature. Le 270P est un dispositif de déclenchement designal à contact sec normalement ouvert qui ne requiert qu’une actionde la part de l’utilisateur pour déclencher une préalarme. Uninterrupteur à touche est utilisé pour activer l’alarme générale aprèsvérification que l’évacuation est nécessaire. (Remarque: La manetted’alarme doit être dans la position pour pouvour insérer la clef.)Le module d’entrée double monté à l’arrière du dispositif surveille leposte. L’entrée 1 est utilisée pour transmettre un signal de préalarmeau contrôleur de boucle quand l’interrupteur est fermé (i.e. quand lamanette est tirée). L’entrée 2 du module est utilisée pour transmettreun signal d’alarme au contrôleur de boucle lorsque l’interrupteur àtouche est activé.

Deux adresses de dispositif sont nécessaires. Le contrôleur deboucle assigne deux adresses au 270P automatiquement, ou desadresses particulières peuvent être assignées au poste via ordinateurportatif; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé.

Le 270P peut être encastré dans une boîte carrée standard de 10,16cm (4 po) de côté et de 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur avec couverclesimple standard, ou il peut être monté en saillie dans une boîteélectrique commandée spécialement. (Se référer à la section desspécifications de cette fiche pour les renseignements relatifs à unecommande). Le bornier accepte des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, et de 0,75mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 16 et 18 AWG sontpréférables.

Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné aux canaux d’entrée 1 et 2 du270P lors de sa fabrication. Lorsque l’interrupteur à touche est activé,un signal d’alarme est transmis au contrôleur de boucle et lacondition d’alarme est verrouillée au niveau du poste d’alarmed’incendie.

tirée

Des témoins à DEL de diagnostic fournissent une indication visible del'état du poste, lorsque le dispositif est retiré de la boîte électrique.

Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote.Alarme/actifLe témoin à DEL rouge clignote.

Le 270P requiert le contrôleur de boucle Signature.

Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d’alarme n/o (Classe B)

SIGA-270PPoste d’alarme d’incendie à deux étages

FIREALARM

FIREALARM

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF

PULL

FIRE

IN CASEOF




TM

4 3 2 1

TB1


Remarques

Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucleSignature pour les spécifications de câblage.

[1]

2 Tout le câblage est limité en courant et surveillé.

Dénuder l’extrémité de TOUS les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.

Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peutprovoquer un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur unelongueur plus courte peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

ATTENTION:

~6 mm 1/4 po( )

P/N: 387051P REV: 5.0 PG: 4 / 4




Témoin à DELrouge

(alarme/actif)




Dénudage des fils

VUE ARRIÈRE


précédent


données (–)

LIFT

NORMAL

Boîte électriquecompatible

Vis dedesserrage du

couvercle


Plaquearrière

Levier dedéclenchement dela barre en verre

1)

2) Ouvrir le poste à manette en utilisant un tournevis à lame platepour tourner la vis de desserrage du couvercle dans le sensinverse des aiguilles d'une montre tout en écartant le couverclede sa plaque arrière.

3) Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défautsde connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.

4) Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.

5) Écrire l'adresse assignée au poste à manette sur l'étiquettefournie et coller cette étiquette sur le poste. Décoller du postel'étiquette de numéro de série et la recoller à l'endroit appropriédans le registre des numéros de série.

6) Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 5/8 po (16 mm) fournies,monter le poste à manette dans la boîte électrique.

7) Tirer le levier de déclenchement de la barre en verre et fairepasser la barre en verre dans le support de montage à l'avant duposte à manette. Pousser le levier de déclenchement de la tigeen verre dans sa position fermée. Positionner l'interrupteur àbascule à la position NORMALE et pousser le couvercle àenclenchement dans sa position verrouillée.

Le 270P est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il necontient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et NE doitPAS être démonté.

[1]

Description

Device addressing

LEDs

Mounting

System controller compatibility

Personality code 1: N/O alarm latching (Class B)

The Double Action Fire Alarm Station, Model 278, is a component ofthe Signature Series. The 278 is a normally-open, dry contact signalinitiating device that requires two actions by the user in order toinitiate an alarm. First, the upper door marked LIFT THEN PULLHANDLE must be raised to access the alarm handle. Second, thealarm handle must be pulled to initiate an alarm. The single inputmodule mounted to the back of the unit supervises the station andsends an alarm signal to the loop controller when the switch is closed(i.e. when the handle is pulled).

One device address is required. The loop controller assigns anaddress to the 278 automatically. A custom address can be assignedto the station via laptop computer; no addressing switches are used.

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the modulewhen the unit is removed from the electrictal box.


The 278 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep1-gang box, standard 4 in square 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box with 1-gang cover, or European 100 mm square box. The terminal blockswill accept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.

The 278 requires the Signature Loop Controller.

The 278 has a factory assigned personality code 1. Personality code1 configures the 278 for Class B operation. When the pull lever isactivated, an alarm signal is sent to the Loop Controller and the alarmcondition is latched at the fire alarm station.





Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH

Construction: High impact plastic with steel backplate

Operating mechanism: Double action, pull lever

Shipping Weight: 1.0 lbs (0.4 kg)

Compatible electrical boxesNorth American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxStandard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box with 1-gangcover

Replacement glass rodsUSA, P/N 276-GLR (pkg 20 rods)CAN, P/N 276-GLR (pkg 20 rods)

Special order surface mount boxes27193-10: Cream enamel finish

µ

µ

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

PRODUCT INFORMATION

WARNINGS


SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT THENPULL HANDLE


PULL FORPULL FOR

FIREFIRE

DATE: 02JUN99

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 5.0




SIGA-278Double Action Fire Alarm Station




TM

P/N: 387047P REV: 5.0 PG: 2 / 4


1)

2) Open the pull station. Insert the key into the key-latch coverrelease and rotate the key while pulling the cover away from itsbackplate.


4) Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagram.

5) Write the address assigned to the module on the label providedand apply the label to the module. Peel off the removable serialnumber label from the module and apply it to the appropriatelocation in the serial number logbook.

6) Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws provided,mount the pull station to the electrical box.

7) Install the glass rod through the mounting bracket inside of thepull station. Set the toggle switch to the NORMAL position, andsnap the cover into its locked position.

The 278 is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; itcontains no user-serviceable parts and should NOT bedisassembled.

Key-latchcover releaseGlass rod

Toggleswitch


Backplate

OPEN

WIRING DIAGRAM

Notes



REAR VIEWof 278



Green LED(normal)


DATA OUT (+)

DATA OUT (–)

DATA IN (+)

DATA IN (–)

4 3 2 1

TB1




1/4 in (~6 mm)

[1]

Description

Montage



Le poste d’alarme d’incendie à double action, modèle 278, est uncomposant du système Série Signature. Le 278 est un dispositif dedéclenchement de signal à contact sec normalement ouvert qui requiertdeux actions de la part de l’utilisateur pour déclencher une alarme.D’abord, la porte du haut où est marqué SOULEVER PUIS TIRER LAMANETTE doit être montée pour avoir accès à la manette d’alarme.Ensuite, la manette d’alarme doit être tirée pour déclencher une alarme.Le module d’entrée unique monté à l’arrière du dispositif surveille le posteet transmet un signal d’alarme au contrôleur de boucle quandl’interrupteur est fermé (i.e. quand la manette est tirée).

Des témoins à DEL de diagnostic fournissent une indication visible del’état du module, lorsque le dispositif est retiré de la boîte électrique.

Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote.Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote.

Le 278 peut être monté dans une boîte simple standard Amérique du Nordde 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur, dans une boîte carrée standard de10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur avec uncouvercle simple standard ou dans une boîte carrée européenne de 100mm. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, et de 0,75 mm carrés(AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 16 et 18 AWG sont préférables.

Le 278 requiert le contrôleur de boucle Signature.

Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné en usine au 278. Le code depersonnalité 1 configure le 278 pour le fonctionnement en classe B.Quand la manette est tirée, un signal d’alarme est envoyé au contrôleurde boucle et la condition d’alarme est verrouillée au poste d’alarmed’incendie.


Témoins à DEL:

Une adresse de dispositif est nécessaire. Le contrôleur de boucle assigneune adresse au poste automatiquement. Une adresse particulière peutêtre assignée au poste via ordinateur portati; aucun commutateurd’adressage n’est utilisé.


AVERTISSEMENTS

Ce dispositif NE fonctionne PAS en l’absence de courant électrique. Lesincendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous con-seillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protectioncontre les incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécuritésupplémentaires.





Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 - 93 % HR

Construction: Plastique à résistance élevée aux impacts avec plaque arrièreen acier

Mécanisme de fonctionnement: Double action, levier à tirer


Boîtes électriques compatiblesBoîte nord américaine de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur simplestandardBoîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de 38 mm (1-1/2po) de profondeur avec un couvercle simple standard

Barres en verre de remplacementUSA, réf 276-GLR (paquet de 20 barres)CAN, réf 276-GLR (paquet de 12 barres)

Boîtes de montage en saillie, commandées spécialement27193-10: Fini émail crème

µ

µ

P/N: 387047P REV: 5.0 PG: 3 / 4


SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT



FIREFIREPULL FORPULL FOR


SIGA-278Poste d’alarme d’incendie à double action









TM



Remarques

[1] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle Signaturepour les spécifications de câblage.

Tout le câblage est limité en courant et surveillé.2

4 3 2 1

TB1

Dénuder l’extrémité de TOUS les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4 po)avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.

Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut provoquerun défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une longueur plus courtepeut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

ATTENTION:

~6 mm 1/4 po( )

1)

2) Ouvrir le poste à tirette. Insérer la clef dans l’ouverture du couverclepour le verrouillage à clef et tourner la clef tout en écartant lecouvercle de sa plaque arrière.

3) Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts deconnexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.

4) Faire toutes les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.

5) Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie et collercette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module l’étiquette denuméro de série et la recoller à l’endroit approprié dans le registre desnuméros de série.

6) Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (16 mm) fournies, monterle poste à tirette dans la boîte électrique.

7) Faire passer la barre en verre dans le support de montage à l’intérieurdu poste à tirette. Positionner l’interrupteur à bascule à la positionNORMALE et pousser le couvercle à enclenchement dans sa positionverrouillée.

Le 278 est expédié de l’usine assemblé; il ne contient aucuncomposant qui puisse être dépanné par l’utilisateur et NE doitPAS être démonté.

P/N: 387047P REV: 5.0 PG: 4 / 4


Ouverture ducouvercle pourle verrouillage

à clef

OUVRIR

Barre en verre


Plaquearrière

VUE ARRIÈREdu 278 SÉRIE

Témoin à DELrouge

(alarme/actif)




données (–)




précédent


Dénudage des fils

[1]

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONSPower requirements

Frequency response

Harmonic distortion

Input

Output

Signature Data Circuit

Maximum wire size

Backup tone

Operating temperature

Humidity

Standby 1 mA @ 24 VdcActive SIGA-AA30 1.7 A @ 24 VdcActive SIGA-AA50 3.2 A @ 24 Vdc

400 Hz to 4 kHz at -3 dB (ULC)800 Hz to 2.8 kHz (ULI)

< 5%

Channel 1 dual input 1 Vrms or 25 Vrms maximumChannel 2 dual input 1 Vrms or 25 Vrms maximum

SIGA-AA30 30 watts @ 25 Vrms or 70 VrmsSIGA-AA50 50 watts @ 25 Vrms or 70 VrmsConfiguration Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style Z)EOL resistor 47 k

Addresses 2 module addressesEmulation Signature series CC2 module

12 AWG (2.5 mm )

1 kHz

32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C)

0 to 93%, noncondensing

2

° °

INSTALLATION

The SIGA-AAXX is a high-efficiency, dual-input, switch-mode audioamplifier. The amplifier comes in two versions: 30 watt (SIGA-AA30) and50 watt (SIGA-AA50), and has both 1 V and 25 V input levels. Theoutput is supervised, power-limited, and user-selectable for 25 Vrms or70 Vrms output voltage.

An integral Signature module under software control selects the amplifierinput channel. The amplifier reports its status to the Main ControllerModule to reduce the need for additional field wiring. The amplifier alsofeatures a backup amplifier connection, which supports one-to-one orbanked backup amplifiers.

Mount the amplifier with the screws and washers provided.

a. Set JP2 (output voltage) to 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms as required.

b. Set JP3 on the back of the daughter board for the backup mode.

DATE: 30MAR00

Related documentation: WB3(R) Wallbox installation sheet, WB7(R) Wallboxinstallation sheet, RACCR Remote Audio Closet Cabinet installation sheet

INSTALLATION SHEET:

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387343

REVISION LEVEL: 2.0

FILE NAME: 387343.CDR

CREATED BY: B. Graham

APPROVED BY: J. Massing

SIGA-AA30/SIGA-AA50 Audio Amplifiers

Warning!

Jumper Settings

Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removingcomponents. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life.

! Caution!

LED indicators

Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.

JP2 Pins 1 and 2: 70 VrmsPins 2 and 3: 25 Vrms

JP3 In: TB5 signal before 1 kHz backup toneOut: 1 kHz backup tone before TB5 signal

1

2 Configure the amplifier

Screw

Interlocking washer

Audio Amplifier

Primary Power Supply

Main Controller Module

Expander Loop Module

Audio Control Module

Audio Amplifier

LED Color Pattern DescriptionDS1 Green Steady Power amp disabledDS2 Yellow Steady Backup modeDS3 Green Steady Amplifier activeDS4 Green Flashing Normal communications (daughterboard)DS5 Red Flashing Active condition (daughterboard)

Note: See the installation sheets listed in the title box for other placesto mount the Audio Amplifier.

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553

P/N: 387343 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

WIRING

2-AAC

TB1

TB2

TB3

TB1

TB2

TB6

TB4

TB5

TB1

TB2

TB6

TB4

TB5

TB1

TB2

24 Vdc from a listedfire alarm power supply



To the rest of theSignature devices

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

4

2

3

5

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2Typical audioriser out

Typical audioriser return(Class A only)

Audio riser out

Audio riser return

From the SDC

To next deviceif required

Out

Out

Out

In

In

In

DS5

JP3 on reverse side

DS4

DS1

TB3

TB3

TB3

TB1

TB2

25 V

25 V

25 V

25 V

1 V

1 V

COM

COM

COM

COM

COM

COM

+

+

+

+

+

+

_

_

_

_

_

_

SIGA

SIGA

SIGA

In

In

In

Out

Out

Out

Notes Detail

Signature series module: CC1, CC2, or UM

UL/ULC Listed 47 k EOL

All wiring is supervised and power-limited.

The actual placement of the TB1 and TB2output terminals is almost directly behind theinput terminals. Note also that the outputterminals are taller than the input terminals.

See the detail for 1 volt connections.

Daughterboard

a. Connect the power, the Signature DataCircuit (SDC) , the input risers, and thebackup risers as required.

b. Test the circuit before you connect theamplifier to the output wiring.

c. Connect the circuits that check outgood to the appropriate amplifierterminals.

The terminal blocks indicate thepolarity for normal monitoring of thecircuit’s electrical integrity.

Note:

3 Wire the amplifier 25 Vrms input wiring

TB4/TB5 wiring

1 Vrms input wiring

To the Ch 1 input of thenext amplifier

To the Ch 2 input of thenext amplifier

From the Ch 1 output of thesource amplifier

From the Ch 2 output of thesource amplifier

+

+

+

_

_

_

TB6

JP2

JP2

JP2

TB4

TB5

25 V

25 V

25 V

70 V

70 V

70 V

Class B only

Class A only

Audio Amplifier

+

+

_

_

Out

In

+

+

_

_

A

B

SH

NAC

Backup

TB5

TB4DS3 DS2

Audio Amplifier

AudioAmplifier

AudioAmplifier

AudioAmplifier

1 volt connections

CH1AUDIO OUT

+_

+_

++ _ _

CH2AUDIO OUT

Data outData in

INSTALLATION SHEET:

DRAWING PART NO.: 270754P

REVISION LEVEL: 1.12CREATED BY: RW


DATE: 08/12/97

APPROVED BY: RR

SIGA-AB4 Audible Detector Base

SPECIFICATIONS

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SIGA-AB4

6 13/16 in (173 mm)

2.13/16 in(71 mm)

North American 4" (101 mm) Square 2-1/8" (54 mm) Deep Box,2

mud box (concrete ring); European 100 mm .

GS BUILDING SYSTEMSCORPORATION

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION

6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street EastSarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, ON, Canada

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

Temporal Continuous

Operating Voltage (Note #1) 20 to 24 VDC 20 to 24V FWR 20 to 24 VDC 20 to 24V FWR

LowVol.

HighVol.

LowVol.

HighVol.

LowVol.

High HighVol. Vol.

LowVol.

Operating Current (UL 268 Individual alarm) 20mA 44mA 29mA 57mA 20mA 44mA 57mA29mA

Operating Current (UL 464 Reverse Polarity) 50mA 60mA 55mA 73mA 50mA 60mA 73mA55mA

Sound Level Output @ 10 ft (3.05 M) Note #2 Low Volume High Volume Low Volume High Volume

Anechoic - Peak @ 24 VDC 99 dBA 99 dBA 104 dBA 99 dBA 104 dBA

Anechoic - Average @ 24 VDC 94 dBA 98 dBA 94 dBA 98 dBA

Reverberant Room per UL 464 @ 24 VDC 79 dBA 82 dBA 79 dBA 82 dBA

Reverberant Room per UL 464 @ 20 VDC 79 dBA 82 dBA 79 dBA 82 dBA

Reverberant Room per UL 268 85 dBA 85 dBA 85 dBA 85 dBA

Synchronization Pulses at temporal rate within 200 ms on common circuit (Note #3)

Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors

Operating Temperature 32°F to 100°F (0°C to 38°C)

Operating Humidity 0 to 93% RH

Storage Temperature -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C)

Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer, White

Maximum Distance from Ceiling (wall mount) 12 in (305 mm)

Compatible Electrical Boxes North American 4" (101 mm) Square by 2-1/8" (54 mm) deep; mud box (4in x4in octagonal concrete ring); European 100 mm2

Shipping Weight 1 Lb. (0.45 Kg)

NOTES:1. The horn must be connected to a continuous voltage when it is set to sound a temporal horn; it may be connected to either apulsed or continuous voltage when set to sound a steady tone.2. For sleeping area installations, the HIGH VOLUME setting must be used.3. The temporal pattern for the horn is : 1/2s ON, 1/2s OFF, 1/2s ON, 1/2s OFF, 1/2s ON, 1-1/2s OFF, repeat cycle.4. The base will accept #12 AWG (2.5 mm2 ), #14 (1.5 mm2 ), #16 (1.0 mm2 ), and #18 (0.75 mm2 ) wire. Size #16 and #18are preferred.5. Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop wires around terminals.6. Rated 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) when used with model SIGA-PS or SIGA-IS.7. At power up, units may sound for 10 seconds. Do NOT connect 24 VDC until mapping is complete.

WIRING

NOTES

1 All wiring supervised and power limited.2 Sounder operates when detector operates (UL 268).3 Sounder operates when polarity of power supply is reversed, i.e. SIGA-CRR module activated (UL 464).4 Optional SIGA-CR module used to silence sounders.5 End-Of-Line relay must monitor and report power supply trouble to control panel.6 Class B data wiring may be "T-tapped."7 Polarity of power supply circuit shown in supervisory state.

Head Operates Its Sounder(complies with UL 268)

SIGA-CRR Activates ALL Sounders,

Head Operates Its Sounder(complies with UL 268 & UL 464)

DATA IN (-)

DATA OUT (-)

From Signature Controlleror Previous Device

From Power Supplyor Previous Sounder Base

To Next Sounder Base orEOL Relay

To Next Signature Device

DATA IN (+)

24 VDC IN (+) 24 VDC OUT (+)

24 VDC IN (-) 24 VDC OUT (-)

DATA OUT (+)

DA

TA

(+

) IN

/OU

T

DA

TA

(-)

IN

DA

TA

(-)

OU

T

SIG

+

JW1 JW2

SIG

-

JW2OUT = Steady ToneIN = Temporal Tone

JW1OUT = Low VolumeIN = High Volume

Base Wiring and Jumper Settings

Listed 24 VDCPower Supply

Audible Bases6254A-003EOL Relay

SignatureController

Optional SIGA-CRfor disabling/disconnectingsounder base

Listed 24 VDCPower Supply

Optional SIGA-CRfor disabling/disconnectingsounder base

Signature Controller

Audible Bases6254A-003EOL Relay

11

Temporel Continu20 24 V CC 20 24 V FWR 20 24 V CC 20 24 V FWRVolume Volume Volume Volume

( 50 mA 60 mA 55 mA 73 mA 50 mA 60 mA 55 mA 73 mA Volume faible ort Volume faible ort

99 104 dBA 99 dBA 104 dBA94 dBA 98 dBA 94 dBA 98 dBA79 dBA 82 dBA 79 dBA 82 dBA

UL 464 20 V CC 79 dBA 82 dBA 79 dBA 82 dBA UL 268 85 dBA 85 dBA 85 dBA 85 dBA

Tension de fonctionnement (Note n° 1) à à à à

Courant de fonctionnement Alarme individuelle UL 268)

Courant de fonctionnement Polarité inverse UL 464)

Niveau du son en sortie à 3,05 m (10 pi.) Note n° 2

Salle anéchoïque - crête à 24 V CC Salle anéchoïque - moyenne à 24 V CC Chambre de réverbération selon UL 464 à 24 V CC

Chambre de réverbération selon à

Chambre de réverbération selon Synchronisation Impulsions au taux temporaire à moins de 200 msec sur le circuit commun (Note n° 3)

Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série Signature

Température de fonctionnement 0 °C à 38 °C (32 °F à 100 °F)

Humidité de fonctionnement 0 à 93% HR

Température de stockage -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)

Construction et fini Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc Distance maximum du plafond (Montage mural) 304,8 mm (12 po) Boîtes électriques compatibles Amérique du Nord, section carrée de 101,6 mm (4 po) et de 54 mm (2-1/8 po) de

profondeur; boîte à boue (anneau de béton octagonal de 10,16 cm x 10,16 cm 2(4 po x 4 po); Europe 100 mm

Poids à la livraison 0,45 kg (1 livre)

NOTES:1. Base sonore doit être branché à une tension continue quand il est configuré pour émettre un son temporaire; il peut être branché à une tension pulsée

ou continue quand il est configuré pour émettre un son stable.2. Pour les installations où l'on dort, le réglage sur VOLUME FORT doit être utilisé.3. La séquence temporelle pour l'avertisseur est: 1/2s MARCHE, 1/2s ARRÊT, 1/2s MARCHE, 1/2s ARRÊT, 1/2s MARCHE, 1-1/2s ARRÊT, répétition du

cycle. 2 2 2 2 2 24. La base accepte des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75 mm (AWG n° 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 1 mm ou 0,75 mm (AWG n° 16 et 18) sont

préférables.5. Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils autour des bornes.6. Gamme de températures de service: 0 °C à 49 °C (32°F à 120 °F) lorsque l'avertisseur est utilisé avec les modèles SIGA-PS et SIGA-IS.7. À la mise sous tension, les dispositifs peuvent émettre un signal sonore pendant 10 secondes. NE PAS brancher le 24 V CC tant que la mise en

correspondance n'est pas terminée.

Volume Volume Volume Volumefaible fort faible fort faible fort faible fort

( 20 mA 44 mA 29 mA 57 mA 20 mA 44 mA 29 mA 57 mA

Volume f Volume fdBA

FICHE D'INSTALLATION:

DESSIN RÉF.: 270754P

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 1.12CRÉÉ PAR: RW

NOM DU FICHIER: 270754.CDR

DATE: 12/08/97

APPROUVÉ PAR: RR

SIGA-AB4 Base sonore de détecteur


MODE D'INSTALLATION SIGA-AB4

6 13/16 in (173 mm)

2.13/16 in(71 mm)

Boîte nord américaine section carrée 101 mm (4 po) x 54 mm (2-1/8 po) de 2

profondeur; boîte à boue (anneau de béton); européenne 100 mm .

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street EastSarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, ON, CanadaGS BUILDING SYSTEMS

CORPORATION


CÂBLAGE

NOTES

1 L'ensemble du câblage est surveillé et à limitation de courant.2 La base sonore marche lorsque le détecteur marche (UL 268).3 La base sonore marche lorsque la polarité de l'alimentation est inversée, i.e. lorsque le module SIGA-CRR

est activé (UL 464).4 Le module optionnel SIGA-CR sert à réduire les bases sonores au silence.5 Le relais FDL doit surveiller l'alimentation et reporter les problèmes au panneau de commande.6 Le câblage des données en classe B peut être "dérivée en T".7 La polarité du circuit d'alimentation est illustrée dans l'état de supervision.

La tête contrôle sa base sonore (conformément à UL 268)

Le SIGA-CRR active TOUTES bases sonores, la tête contrôle sa base sonore

(conformément à UL 268 et UL 464)

Entrée des données (-)

Sortie des données (-)

Du contrôleur Signature ou du dispositif précédent

De l'alimentation ou de la base sonore précédent

Vers la base sonore suivante ou vers le relais FDL

Vers le dispositif Signature suivant

Entrée des données (+)

Arrivée 24 V CC (+) Sortie 24 V CC (+)

Arrivée 24 V CC (-) Sortie 24 V CC (-)

Sortie des données (+)

DA

TA

(+

) IN

/OU

T

DA

TA

(-)

IN

DA

TA

(-)

OU

T

SIG

+

JW1 JW2

SIG

-

JW2OUT = IN =

Son stableSon temporel

JW1OUT = IN =

Volume faibleVolume forte

Câblage de la base et configuration des cavaliers

Alimentation répertoriée 24 V CC

Bases sonores

Relais FDL 6254A-003

Contrôleur Signature

Contrôleur Signature

SIGA-CR optionnel pour mettre hors service/déconnecter la base sonore

SIGA-CR optionnel pour mettre hors service/déconnecter la base sonore

11

Alimentation répertoriée 24 V CC

Bases sonoresRelais FDL 6254A-003

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

DATE: 30MAR00

INSTALLATION SHEET:

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387342 FILE NAME: 387342.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 2.0


APPROVED BY: J. Massing

SIGA-APS (-220)Auxiliary Power Supply Module

Warning!

Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life.

AC Input voltageSIGA-APS 120 Vac @ 300 W maximum, 50/60 HzSIGA-APS-220 220 Vac @ 300 W maximum, 50/60 Hz

2Maximum wire size 12 AWG (2.5 mm )

Output voltageNominal rating 24 Vdc @ 6.75 A totalOutput circuits Two power-limited circuits rated at 24 Vdc @

3.2 A each2Maximum wire size 12 AWG (2.5 mm )

Battery chargingCharge current 1.0 ACharge capacity 10 Ah

SignatureAddressing Two module addressesPersonality Code 03 (Emulates SIGA-CT2)

2Maximum wire size 14 AWG (1.5 mm )

Environmental ConditionsTemperature range 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Humidity 93%, Non-condensing

INSTALLATION

Mount the SIGA-APS with the screws and washers provided.

! Caution!


The routing of power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring differs with each cabinet. For more information on the routing of power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring, see the cabinet’s installation sheet.

WIRE ROUTING

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

#6 interlocking washers

6/32 x 3/8 pan head screws

The SIGA-APS is a switch-mode auxiliary power supply designed to provide additional power for audio components and external Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs). The power supply monitors the AC line, performs ground fault testing, and charges batteries (up to 10 Ah). The SIGA-APS also provides a smooth and uninterrupted transition to batteries in the event of an AC power loss.

All trouble conditions detected by the SIGA-APS are transmitted to the fire alarm control panel through its connection to the Signature Data Circuit (SDC), eliminating the need for additional devices. All connections intended to leave the cabinet are fully protected against direct and induced transient voltage conditions.

Auxiliary Power Supply


WIRING

387342.CDR REV 2.0 Page 2 of 2


1/4 inch (6.4 mm)

Strip 1/4 inch from the ends of ALL wires that connect to the terminal blocks of the module.

Caution:Exposing more than 1/4 inch of wire may cause a ground fault.Exposing less than 1/4 inch of wire may result in a faulty connection.

L1

L2

G

TB1

TB1

TB2

TB3

TB4

24 Vdc+

24 Vdc+

+

+

_

NAC2 power

Data out

SignatureDataCircuit

Data in

NAC1 power

_

_

_

To dedicated 120 Vac, 15 Amp, 50/60 Hz supervised branch circuit

To dedicated 220 Vac, 7.5 Amp, 50/60 Hz supervised branch circuit

Ground

Line 1

Line 2

Hot

Neutral

Ground

220 Vac Auxiliary Power Supply

120 Vac Auxiliary Power Supply

See the details below for the battery terminal wiring.

Notes

Power-limited

Nonpower-limited

Supervised

Nonsupervised

1

1

2

2 4

2 4

2

3

4

3

13

SIGA-AAXX

SIGA-AAXX

Route the battery wiring harness (P/N 250181) through the plastic channel under the SIGA-AAXX amplifiers to the battery terminals.

Battery+

_

Top view

black wire

red wire

TB2

Battery

+ +_ _

Battery

+ +_ _

Plastic channel

Auxiliary Power Supply

TB2

BATTERY

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387022P REV: 7.0SIGA-CC1 - Single Input Signal Module 1 / 2

SIGA-CC1Single Input Signal Module

Product description

The SIGA-CC1 Single Input Signal Module is a component of theSignature Series. The SIGA-CC1 is an analog addressable deviceused to connect a supervised output circuit to the riser bus. The SIGA-CC1 does not provide supervision of the riser; the fire alarm panelmust provide this function. Upon command from the loop controller, theSIGA-CC1 connects the output circuit to the riser input which can be24 Vdc to operate polarized audible and visible signals, 25 V or 70 V tooperate audio evacuation circuits, or telephone audio. One deviceaddress is required.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CC1 automatically.A custom address can also be assigned to the module via laptopcomputer. No addressing switches are used.

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the modulewhen the cover plate is removed:

• Normal: green LED flashes• Alarm/active: red LED flashes

MountingThe SIGA-CC1 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm)deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deepwith a 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWGwire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.

System controller compatibilityThe SIGA-CC1 requires the Signature loop controller. The loopcontroller downloads the personality code which determines how themodule operates. The following personality codes can be downloadedto the SIGA-CC1.

Personality code 5: Riser selector (single input): The SIGA-CC1 isassigned personality code 5 at the factory. This configures the moduleas a riser selector for signal power (24 Vdc) or audio evacuation (25 or70 Vac). Since the module is not used for telephone audio, the ring-tone generator is disabled for this personality code. The output circuitis monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a short exists, the controlpanel inhibits the activation of the audible or visible signal circuit, sothat the riser is not connected to the wiring fault.

Personality code 6: Riser selector (single-input) ring-tone: Personalitycode 6 configures the module as a telephone riser selector. When atelephone handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its hook, themodule generates its own ring-tone signal. A separate ring-tone riser isunnecessary. The module sends this signal to the control panel toindicate the presence of an off-hook condition, and waits for thesystem operator to respond to the call. When the system operatorresponds, the ring-tone signal is disabled.

Warnings1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires

frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discussfurther safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

2. This module does not support conventional smoke detectors.

SpecificationsOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcStandby current 223 µAActivated current: 100 µAOutput ratings

24 Vdc: 2 A25 Vac audio: 50 W70 Vac audio: 35 WEOL resistor value: 47 kΩMax. circuit resistance: refer to manualMax. circuit capacitance: 0.1 µF

Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °F)Construction: High impact engineering polymerShipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g)Compatible electrical boxes

North American 2.5 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang boxStandard 4 in (101.6 mm) x 1.5 in (38 mm) deep square box witha 2-gang cover

Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-CC1 is shipped from the factory as an assembledunit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not bedisassembled.

To install the module:

1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and groundfaults.

2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagram.

3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label providedand apply the label to the module. Peel off the removable serialnumber label from the module and apply it to the appropriatelocation in the serial number logbook.

4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw provided,mount the wall plate to the module.

5. Using the four 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws provided,mount the module to the electrical box.

Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.

Wire stripping guide

1/4 in (~6 mm)

Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that connect to theterminal block of the module.

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. Exposing lesswire may result in a faulty connection.

P/N: 387022P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 2 SIGA-CC1 - Single Input Signal Module

Transient protection caution

Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)

The SIGA-CC1 requires transient protection for installations thatconnect electromechanical bells or horns to output circuits. Themodule's circuitry requires a Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)for protection against transient spikes caused by the inductive load ofbells or horns.

Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across the terminalsof the bell or horn electrically closest to the module. The bipolartransient protector is not polarity-sensitive.

Locate bells and horns at least 6 ft (1.83 m) from the module.

Wiring diagram

Data out (-)To next device

Data out (+)Data in (-)

Data in (+)

Riser out (+)

Transient protection(see "Transient protectioncaution" above

UL/ULC listed47K EOLΩ

To next device orEOL resistor suppliedwith UL/ULC listedcontrol panelRiser in (+)

Riser in (-)[5]

Riser out (-)

[4][3]

Personality codes 5:typical notificationappliance circuit

Style Y (Class B)

From Signature controlleror previous device

From UL/ULC listedcontrol panel

[1] [2] [5]

Personality code 6:typical telephone circuit

Personality code 5:typical speaker circuit

[8]


Green LED(normal)12345678

910

Notes[1] For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appropriate technical

reference manual

[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG (0.75 sqmm) wire

[3] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for wiringspecifications

[4] Supervised and power-limited

[5] Supervised and power-limited when connected to power limitedsource. If non-power limited, then all power limited wiring in boxmust use FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable or equivalent per NEC.Power limited marking must be eliminated.

6. This module does not support 2-wire smoke detectors

7. Polarity at terminals 9 and 10 on notification appliance, telephone,and speaker circuits shown in supervisory condition. Connect asshown in diagram. Polarity reverses on alarm.

[8] For EN54 applications, an RFK1 must be added to the outputcircuit

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 3100152 REV: 3.0SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module 1 / 4

SIGA-CC1SAuto-Sync Output Module

Product description

The SIGA-CC1S Auto-Sync Output Module is a component ofthe Signature Series. The SIGA-CC1S is an intelligent, analog-addressable device used to connect a supervised output circuitto a signal riser. Upon command from the Signature loopcontroller, SIGA-CC1S connects the output circuit to the riserinput. The output circuit energizes a riser to operate:

• 24 Vdc polarized audible and visual notification appliances(Note 1)

• 25 Vac audible evacuation circuits• 70 Vac audible evacuation circuits• Telephone audio

Notes

• The output circuit uses a resynchronizing feature tooperate polarized notification appliances if they arecompatible with Genesis series products. See thecompatibility section below.

• The SIGA-CC1S does not supervise the 24 Vdc riser; thefire alarm control panel provides this function.

One device address is required. The loop controller assigns anaddress to the SIGA-CC1S automatically. A custom addresscan also be assigned to the module via laptop computer. Noaddressing switches are used.

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of themodule when the cover plate is removed:


Mounting

The SIGA-CC1S can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in(64 mm) deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2in (38 mm) deep with 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.


The SIGA-CC1S requires the Signature loop controller. Theloop controller downloads the personality code whichdetermines how the module operates. The followingpersonality codes can be downloaded to the SIGA-CC1S.

Personality code 5: Single-input riser selector: Personalitycode 5 configures the module as a signal power (24 Vdc) riserselector. The output wiring is monitored for open and shortcircuits. A short circuit causes the fire alarm control panel toinhibit the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit so theriser is not connected to the wiring fault.

Personality code 6: Riser selector (single-input) ring-tone:Personality code 6 configures the module as a telephone riserselector. When a telephone handset is plugged into its jack orlifted from its hook, the module generates its own ring-tonesignal. A separate ring-tone riser is unnecessary. The modulesends this signal to the control panel to indicate the presenceof an off-hook condition, and waits for the system operator torespond to the call. When the system operator responds, thering-tone signal is disabled.

Personality code 25: Auto sync output (default):Personality code 25 configures the module to providesynchronization of compatible fire alarm signals across multiplezones. The output wiring is monitored for open circuits andshort circuits. A short circuit causes the fire alarm control panelto inhibit the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit so theriser is not connected to the wiring fault. Personality code 25 isonly compatible with EST3, ADT3000, and XLS1000 panels.

Note: You may use nonsynchronous fire alarm signals with orinstead of compatible synchronized fire alarm signals, but theoperation of these devices will not comply with UL 1971.

Warnings1. Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing

components. Failure to do so may result in serious injuryor loss of life. Dangerous voltages may be present at theterminals even when power is shut off!

2. This module will not operate without electrical power. Asfires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest youdiscuss further safeguards with your local fire protectionspecialist.

3. This module does not support conventional smokedetectors.


24 Vdc (telephone riser also): 2 A25 Vac audio: 50 W70 Vac audio: 35 WEOL resistor value: 47 kΩ

Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °F)Construction: High impact engineering polymer

P/N: 3100152 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module

Shipping weight: 0.48 lb (0.21 kg)Compatible electrical boxes

North American 2.5 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang boxStandard 4 in (101.6 mm) x 1.5 in (38 mm) deep squarebox with 2-gang cover

Synchronization: Meets UL1971 synchronization requirement.All signaling devices signal within 0.01 seconds of eachother for a period of at least two hours while maintaining aone hertz signal rate. (For list of compatible devices, seeCompatible device table.)

Note: For synchronization, the maximum resistance betweenany two devices is 20 Ω. See the voltage specifications forthe SIGA-CC1S, the signaling device, and the controlpanel to determine the maximum allowable wireresistance.

Number of devices

Strobe candela rating Maximum strobes

15, 15PS, 5A 29

30, 15/75, 3A, 7A 16

60, 75PS, 6A 11

75 10

110, 8A 8

Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-CC1S is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.


1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, andground faults.

2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiringdiagram.

3. Write the address assigned to the module on the labelprovided and apply the label to the module. Peel off theremovable serial number label from the module and applyit to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screwprovided, mount the wall plate to the module.

5. Using the four 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screwsprovided, mount the module to the electrical box.

Note

Install in accordance with applicable requirements of the latesteditions of the NFPA codes and standards, the CanadianElectrical code (Part 1, Section 32), and the authority havingjurisdiction.


1/4 in (~6 mm)

Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires thatconnect to the terminal block of the module.

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 3100152 REV: 3.0SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module 3 / 4

Wiring diagram

12345678

Red LED(active/short)

Green LED(normal/trouble)

910

Data out (-)

Data out (+)

Data in (-)

Data in (+)

Riser out (+)

Riser in (+)

Riser in (-)

[4] [2]

Riser out (-)

Auto-Sync Output Module

[5][3][2]

+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

Personality codes 5 and 25: typical notification appliance circuit

[1] [2] [4]

Personality code 6: typical telephone circuit

Personality code 5: typical speaker circuit

[6] [7]

+_

[8]

[8]

[8][9]

Notes

[1] Maximum 25 Ω resistance per wire. Maximum circuitcapacitance of 0.1 µF

[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG(0.75 sq mm) wire

[3] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet forwiring specifications

[4] Power-limited unless connected to a nonpower-limitedsource. If the source is nonpower-limited, eliminate thepower-limited mark and:

• Maintain a 1/4 in (6.4 mm) space from power-limited wiring. (For other mounting methods, seeenclosure and bracket installation sheets tomaintain separation of power-limited andnonpower-limited wiring.)

or

• Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable inaccordance with the National Electric Code(required for electrical box installations).


[6] Supervised

[7] Polarity shown in supervisory condition. Polaritychanges on alarm.

[8] UL/ULC listed 47 kΩ EOL

[9] Transient protection (see “Transient protection caution”below)


The SIGA-CC1S requires transient protection forinstallations that connect electromechanical bells or horns tooutput circuits. The module's circuitry requires a bipolartransient protector (P/N 235196P) for protection againsttransient spikes caused by the inductive load of bells orhorns.

Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across theterminals of the bell or horn electrically closest to themodule. The bipolar transient protector is not polarity-sensitive.

Locate bells and horns at least 6 ft (1.83 m) from themodule.


P/N: 3100152 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module

CompatibilityThe SIGA-CC1S is compatible with Genesis, Enhanced Integrity (synchronized), and Enhanced Integrity Power Saver(synchronized) models.

Compatible device table

Description Model number

Genesis strobes *G1-V15, *G1R-V15, *G1-V30, *G1R-V30, *G1-V60, *G1R-V60, *G1-V75, *G1R-V75,*G1-V110, *G1R-V110

Genesis horn strobes, high output *G1-HOV15, *G1R-HOV15, *G1-HOV30, *G1R-HOV30, *G1-HOV60, *G1R-HOV60,*G1-HOV75, *G1R-HOV75, *G1-HOV110, *G1R-HOV110

Genesis horn strobes, low output *G1-HV15, *G1R-HV15, *G1-HV30, *G1R-HV30, *G1-HV60, *G1R-HV60, *G1-HV75,*G1R-HV75

Genesis wall speakers strobe *G4-S2VM, *G4R-S2VM, *G4-S7VM, *G4R-S7VM

Substitute XLS or ADT for *



Integrity mini strobes, synchronized *202-15PS, *202-15PSW, *202-75PS, *202-75PSW, *202-3A-T, *202-3A-TW,*202-5A-T, *202-5A-TW, *202-7A-T, *202-7A-TW, *202-8A-T, *202-8A-TW

Integrity strobes, four inch square box 405-15PS, 405-15PSW, *405-3A-T, *405-3A-TW, *405-5A-T, *405-5A-TW, 405-6A-T,405-6A-TW, 405-75PS, 405-75PSW, *405-7A-T, *405-7A-TW, *405-8A-T,*405-8A-TW, CS405-7A-T, CS405-8A-T

Integrity chime strobes *757-3A-CS, *757-3A-CSW, *757-5A-CS, *757-5A-CSW, *757-7A-CS, *757-7A-CSW,*757-8A-CS, *757-8A-CSW

Integrity horn strobes, temporal 757-7A-T, 757-7A-TW, 757-8A-T, 757-8A-TW

Integrity speaker strobes *757-3A-SS25, *757-3A-SS25W, *757-3A-SS70, *757-3A-SS70W, *757-5A-SS25,*757-5A-SS25W, *757-5A-SS70, *757-5A-SS70W, *757-7A-SS25, *757-7A-SS25W,*757-7A-SS70, *757-7A-SS70W, *757-8A-SS25, *757-8A-SS25W, *757-8A-SS70,*757-8A-SS70W

Integrity speaker strobes, re-entrant wallmount

*757-3A-RS25, *757-3A-RS25W, *757-3A-RS70, *757-3A-RS70W, *757-7A-RS25,*757-7A-RS25W, *757-7A-RS70, *757-7A-RS70W, *757-8A-RS25, *757-8A-RS25W,*757-8A-RS70, *757-8A-RS70W

Integrity speaker strobes, ceiling mount25V

*964-3A-4RR, *964-3A-4RW, *964-3A-8RW, 964-3A-8SW, *964-5A-4RR,*964-5A-4RW, *964-5A-8RW, 964-5A-8SW, *964-7A-4RR, *964-7A-4RW,*964-7A-8RW, 964-7A-8SW, *964-8A-4RR, *964-8A-4RW, *964-8A-8RW,964-8A-8SW

Integrity speaker strobes, ceiling mount70V

*965-3A-4RR, *965-3A-4RW, *965-3A-8RW, 965-3A-8SW, *965-5A-4RR,*965-5A-4RW, *965-5A-8RW, 965-5A-8SW, *965-7A-4RR, *965-7A-4RW,*965-7A-8RW, 965-7A-8SW, *965-8A-4RR, *965-8A-4RW, *965-8A-8RW,965-8A-8SW

Bell strobes adapter plate *403-3A-R, *403-5A-R, *403-7A-R, *403-8A-R

Power-saver speaker strobes *757S2-15PS, *757S2-15PSW, *757S7-15PS, *757S7-15PSW, *757S2-75PS,*757S2-75PSW, *757S7-75PS, *757S7-75PSW

Substitute XLS for *

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387040P REV: 7.0SIGA-CC2 - Dual Input Signal Module 1 / 2

SIGA-CC2Dual Input Signal Module

Product description

The SIGA-CC2 Dual Input Signal Module is a component of theSignature Series. The SIGA-CC2 is an analog addressable deviceused to connect up to two supervised output circuits (riser 1 and riser2). The SIGA-CC2 does not provide supervision of the riser; the firealarm panel must provide this function. Upon command from the loopcontroller, the SIGA-CC2 connects the output circuit to either the riser1 or riser 2 bus, which can be 24 Vdc to operate polarized audible andvisible signals or 25 V or 70 V to operate audio evacuation circuits.Two device addresses are required.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CC2 automatically.A custom address can also be assigned to the module via laptopcomputer. No addressing switches are used.



Mounting

The SIGA-CC2 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm)deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deepwith 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWGwire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.


The SIGA-CC2 requires the Signature loop controller. The loopcontroller downloads the personality code which determines how themodule operates. The following personality codes can be downloadedto the SIGA-CC2.

Personality code 7: Riser selector (dual input): The SIGA-CC2 isfactory assigned personality code 7. Personality code 7 configures theSIGA-CC2 as a one or two output signal power (24 Vdc) or audioevacuation (25 V or 70 V) riser selector. Each output circuit ismonitored for open or shorted wiring. f a short exists, the control panelinhibits the activation of the audible or visible signal circuit, so the riseris not connected to the wiring fault.



2. This module does not support conventional smoke detectors.


24 Vdc: 2 A25 Vac audio: 50 W70 Vac audio: 35 WEOL resistor value: 47 kΩMax. circuit resistance: refer to manualMax. circuit capacitance: 0.1 µF

Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °F)Construction: High impact engineering polymerShipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g)Compatible electrical boxes

North American 2.5 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang boxStandard 4 in (101.6 mm) x 1.5 in (38 mm) deep square box with2-gang cover

Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-CC2 is shipped from the factory as an assembledunit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not bedisassembled.







Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.


1/4 in (~6 mm)



P/N: 387040P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 2 SIGA-CC2 - Dual Input Signal Module



The SIGA-CC1 requires transient protection for installations thatconnect electromechanical bells or horns to output circuits. Themodule's circuitry requires a Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)for protection against transient spikes caused by the inductive load ofbells or horns.

Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across the terminalsof the bell or horn electrically closest to the module. The bipolartransient protector is not polarity-sensitive.


Wiring diagram

To next device(-) (-)(+) (+)

Install the Bi-Polar Transient Protector here.

UL/ULC listed47K EOLΩ

To next device orEOL resistor suppliedwith UL/ULC listedcontrol panel (+)

(+)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(-)

(-)

[5]

[4][3]

Typical notification appliance circuit

Style Y (Class B)


From UL/ULC listedcontrol panel

From UL/ULC listed control panel

[1] [2] [5]


Green LED(normal)12345

11

6

12

7

13

8

14 910

Typical speaker circuit

Riser in

Ch 2 (Input 2) Riser in

Riser out

Riser out

Ch 1 (Input 1)

Ch 1 (Input 1)

Ch 2 (Input 2)

Data in Data out

[5]

Notes[1] For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appropriate technical

reference manual

[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG (0.75 sqmm) wire

[3] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for wiringspecifications


[5] Supervised and power-limited when connected to power limitedsource. If non-power limited, then all power limited wiring in boxmust use FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable or equivalent per NEC.Power limited marking must be eliminated.

6. This module does not support 2-wire smoke detectors

7. Polarity at terminals 9 and 10 on notification appliance, telephone,and speaker circuits shown in supervisory condition. Connect asshown in diagram. Polarity reverses on alarm.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387023P REV: 7.0SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module 1 / 4

SIGA-CRControl Relay Module

Product description

1234

678

The SIGA-CR Control Relay Module is a component of theSignature Series. The SIGA-CR is an addressable device usedto provide one Form C dry relay contact to control externalappliances (door closers, fans, dampers, etc.) or equipmentshutdown. The system firmware ensures that the relay is in theproper ON/OFF state. Upon command from the loop controller,the SIGA-CR relay energizes. TB2-6 and TB2-7 provide anormally closed relay connection; TB2-7 and TB2-8 provide anormally open relay connection. One device address isrequired.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CRautomatically. A custom address can also be assigned to themodule via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.



Mounting

The SIGA-CR can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.


The SIGA-CR requires the Signature loop controller.

Personality Code 8: dry contact output: The SIGA-CR isfactory assigned personality code 8 which configures theSIGA-CR as an output dry relay contact.

Warnings1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As

fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest youdiscuss further safeguards with your local fire protectionspecialist.


SpecificationsOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcStandby current: 100 µAActivated current: 100 µAContact ratings (pilot duty)

24 Vdc @ 2A120 Vac @ 0.5 A

Relay type: Form COperating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Construction: High impact engineering polymerShipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)Compatible electrical boxes

North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxStandard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with1-gang cover

Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-CR is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.






5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screwsprovided, mount the module to the electrical box.

Notes

1. If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter theelectrical box through only one knock-out hole.

2. If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enterthe electrical box through one or both knock-out holes.

3. Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National ElectricalCode.

P/N: 387023P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module


1/4 in (~6 mm)




Wall plate, white(1-gang)

Wiring diagram

(+)

(–)DATA OUT

Red LED(Alarm / Active)

TB2

TB1

Green LED(normal)

(+)

(–)


[1] [4]

[2] [5]

To next device

NormallyOpen

NormallyClosedCommon

DATA IN

1234

678

Notes

[1] Refer to the Signature loop controller installation sheet forwiring specifications

[2] The SIGA-CR must be installed within the same room asthe device it is controlling

3. Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG(0.75 sq mm) wire

[4] All wiring is power-limited and supervised

[5] Supervised and power limited when connected to powerlimited source. If non-power limited, then all power limitedwiring in box must use FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable orequivalent per NEC. Power limited marking musteliminated.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387023P REV: 7.0SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module 3 / 4

SIGA-CRModule ‘Relais de commande

Description de produit

1234

678

Le Module ‘Relais de commande SIGA-CR est un composant dusystème série Signature. Le SIGA-CR est un dispositif adressableutilisé pour fournir un contact de relais sec C et commander desappareils externes (fermetures automatiques de portes, ventilateurs,registres, etc.) ou l’arrêt d’équipement. Le microprogiciel du systèmeassure que le relais rest en position marche/arrêt correct. À lacommande du contrôleur de boucle, le relais SIGA-CR est mis soustension. Les bornes TB2-6 et TB2-7 fournissent une connexion derelais normalement fermée. Les bornes TB2-7 et TB2-8 fournissentune connexion de relais normalement ouvert. Une adresse dedispositif est nécessaire.

Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement une adresse auSIGA-CR ou une adresse particulière peut être assignée au modulevia ordinateur portatif; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé.

Des témoins à DEL donnent une indication visuelle de l’état du modulelorsque la plaque de protection est retirée.

• Normal: le témoin à DEL vert clignote• Alarme/actif: le témoin à DEL rouge clignote

Montage

Le SIGA-CR peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nord simplestandard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîte carréede 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur aveccouvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, et de0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de 0,75mm carrés sont préférables.


Le SIGA-CR est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs deboucle Signature.

Code de personnalité 8: sortie de contact sec: Un code depersonalité de 8 est assigné au CR lors de sa fabrication et leconfigure comme contact de relais sec de sortie.

Avertissements1. Ce module ne fonctionne pas en l’absence de courant électrique.

Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant,nous conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste localde protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place desystèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.

2. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fuméeconventionnels.

CaractéristiquesTension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 VccCourant de veille: 100 µACourant de fonctionnement actif: 100 µAAmpèrage des contacts (fonction de commande)

24 V CC et 2A120 V CA et 0,5 A

Type de relais: CGamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 à 93 % HRGamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impactsPoids à la livraison: 145 g (5,1 oz)Boîtes électriques compatibles

Boîte Amérique du Nord simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) deprofondeurBoîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2po) de profondeur, avec couvercle simple

InstallationNote: Le SIGA-CR est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il necontient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas êtredémonté.

Pour installer le module:

1. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défautsde connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.

2. Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.

3. Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie etcoller cette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module l’étiquettede numéro de série et la recoller à l’endroit approprié dans leregistre des numéros de série.

4. Avec le vis autotaraudeuses de 4-24 x 1/2 po. (13 mm) fournie,monter la plaque murale sur le module.

5. Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm) fournies,monter le module dans la boîte électrique.

Notes

1. Si une boîte standard simple de 51 mm (2 po) est utilisée, leconduit électrique ne peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique quepar une débouchure seulement.

2. Si une boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) est utilisée, leconduit électrique peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique par unedébouchure ou par les deux.

3. Le câblage doit être conforme à la NFPA 70, National ElectricCode.

P/N: 387023P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module

Dénudage des fils

~6 mm 1/4 po ( )

Dénuder l’extrémité de tous les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.

Attention: Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut provoquerun défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une longueur plus courtepeut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

Plaque murale, blanche (simple standard)


Schéma de câblage

(+)

(–)

SORTIE DES DONNÉES

Témoin à DEL rouge (Alarme/Actif)

TB2

TB1

Témoin àDEL vert(Normal)

(+)

(–)

Du contrôleur de boucle Signature ou du dispositif précédent

[1] [4]

[2] [5]

Au dispositif suivant

Normalement ouvert

Normalement ferméCommun

ENTRÉE DES DONNÉES

1234

678

Notes

[1] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucleSignature pour obtenir les spécifications du câblage

[2] Le SIGA-CR doit être installé dans la même pièce que le dispositifqu’il contrôle

3. Calibre de fil maximum: 2,5 mm carrés (AWG 12); minimum: 0,75mm carrés (AWG 18)

[4] Puissance limitée et contrôlée pour l’ensemble du câblage

[5] Supervisé et limité en courant lorsque raccordé à la source decourant limité. Si non limité en courant, alors tous les câbles àcourant limité à l'intérieur du boîtier doit être un câble de typeFPL, FPLR, FPLP ou équivalent tel que NEC. L'identification decourant limité doit être éliminé.

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387336P REV: 3.0 SIGA-CRR - Polarity Reversal Relay 1 / 4

SIGA-CRR Polarity Reversal Relay

Product description

1234

5678

The SIGA-CRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module is a component of the Signature Series. The SIGA-CRR is an addressable device used to power and activate the audible sounder in Signature Audible Detector Bases. The module can support a 2 A load of bases. The system firmware ensures that the relay is in the proper state when powered up. On a command from the loop controller, the SIGA-CRR relay energizes, reversing the polarity of its 24 Vdc output. One device address is required.

The SIGA-CRR requires the Signature loop controller. The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CRR automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the module when the cover plate is removed:

• Normal: green LED flashes • Alarm/active: red LED flashes

Programming Personality Code 8: Dry contact output: The SIGA-CRR is assigned personality code 8 at the factory. This configures the module as an output dry relay contact.

WARNING: This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

Specifications Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Standby current: 100 µA Activated current: 100 µA Contact ratings (pilot duty): 24 Vdc @ 2A Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C) Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH, noncondensing Wire gauge: 12 to18 AWG (2.5 to 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and

18 AWG are preferred. Compatible bases: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Compatible electrical boxes North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with

1-gang cover Construction: High impact engineering polymer Shipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g) Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation instructions To install the module:

1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground faults.


3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the removable serial number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw provided, mount the wall plate to the module.

5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws provided, mount the module to the electrical box. See Figure 1.

6. The module can be mounted in the fire alarm enclosure using the SIGA-MP2 Mounting Plate. See Figure 2.

Notes

• The SIGA-CRR is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled.

• If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the electrical box through only one knockout hole.

• If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the electrical box through one or both knockout holes.

• Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

2 / 4 13NOV03 P/N: 387336P REV: 3.0


Wall plate, white (1-gang)

Figure 1: Mounting in compatible electrical box

Enclosure wall

Standoffs

Modules

SIGA-MP2 mounting plateStandoffs

Figure 2: Mounting in SIGA-MP2

Wiring diagrams All wiring is power-limited and supervised.

Schematic

Power in Power out

Polarity reverseswhen activated

8 7 6 5

4 3 2 1

+–

+–

+–

+–Data in Data out

Typical application

The following wiring diagram shows a typical application. Here, each detector operates its sounder base. The SIGA-CRR is used to activate all sounders, according to system programming rules. The SIGA-CR is optional, and is used to disable or disconnect the sounders.

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

SIGA-AB4G


controller

–+

24 VdcFrom listed

power supply

+–


supervising module

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

SIGA-AB4GFirst device Last device

8 7 6

4 3 2 1

SIGA-CR

8 7 6 5

4 3 2 1

SIGA-CRR

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387336P REV: 3.0 SIGA-CRR - Polarity Reversal Relay 3 / 4

SIGA-CRR Module 'Relais à inversion de polarité'


1234

5678

Le module 'Relais à inversion de polarité'; modèle SIGA-CRR, est un composant du système série Signature. Le SIGA-CRR est un dispositif adressable utilisé pour alimenter en courant et activer les Bases Sonore de Détecteur de Signature. Le module peut accommoder une charge de bases correspondant à 2 ampères. Le microprogiciel du système assure que le relais est dans l'état correct quand il est mis sous tension. À la commande du con-trôleur de boucle, le relais SIGA-CRR est mis sous tension, inver-sant la polarité de sa sortie 24 volts CC. Une adresse de dispositif est nécessaire.

Le SIGA-CRR est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs de boucle Signature. Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement une adresse au SIGA-CRR ou une adresse particulière peut être assignée au module via ordinateur portatif; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé.

Des témoins à DEL donnent une indication visuelle de l’état du module lorsque la plaque de protection est retirée:

• Normal: le témoin à DEL vert clignote • Alarme/actif: le témoin à DEL rouge clignote

Programmation Code de personnalité 8: Sortie de contact sec: Un code de personalité de 8 est assigné au SIGA-CRR lors de sa fabrication et le configure comme contact de relais sec de sortie.

AVERTISSEMENT: Ce module NE fonctionne PAS en l'absence de courant électrique. Puisque les incendies provoquent souvent des interruptions de courant, nous conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.

Specifications Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc Courant de veille: 100 µA Courant de fonctionnement actif: 100 µA Ampèrage des contacts (fonction de commande): 24 V CC et

2A Température de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F) Humidité de fonctionnement: 0 à 93 % HR Épaisseur du fil: 2,5 à 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12 à 18). Des fils

de 1,0 et de 0,75 mm carrés sont préférables. Bases compatibles: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Boîtes électriques compatibles Boîte Amérique du Nord simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2

po) de profondeur Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38

mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur, avec couvercle simple Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux

impacts Poids à la livraison: 145 g (5,1 oz) Température de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)

Installation


1. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts de connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.


3. Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module l’étiquette de numéro de série et la recoller à l’endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros de série.

4. Avec le vis autotaraudeuses de 4-24 x 5/16 po. (8 mm) fournie, monter la plaque murale sur le module.

5. Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm) fournies, monter le module dans la boîte électrique.

6. Le module peut être monté dans le boîtier de l'avertisseur d'incendie en utilisant la plaque de montage SIGA-MP2.

Notes

• Le SIGA-CRR est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il ne contient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas être démonté.

• Si une boîte standard simple de 51 mm (2 po) est utilisée, le conduit électrique ne peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique que par une débouchure seulement.

• Si une boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) est utilisée, le conduit électrique peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique par une débouchure ou par les deux.

• Le câblage doit être conforme à la NFPA 70, National Electric Code.

P/N: 387336P REV: 3.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet 4 / 4 SIGA-CRR - Polarity Reversal Relay



Figure 1: Montage en boîtes électrique compatible

Plaque de montage du SIGA-MP2

Mur de fixation du boîtier

Intercalaires

Modules

Intercalaires

Figure 2: Montage en SIGA-MP2

Schémas de câblage L'ensemble du câblage est surveillé et à limitation de courant.

Schéma

8 7 6 5

4 3 2 1

+–

+–

+–

+–

Tensiond'entrée

Tensionde sortie

La polarité s'inverse quand le relais est activé

Entré desdonnées

Sortie desdonnées

Application typique

Le diagramme de câblage suivant montre une application typique. Ici, chaque détecteur actionne sa base sonore. Le SIGA-CRR est employé pour activer tous les sondeurs, selon des règles de programmation système. Le SIGA-CR (en option) et est employé pour mettre hors service ou débrancher tous les bases sonore.

Entré des données du

contrôleur Signature

Alimentation 24 volts CC

répertoriée

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

SIGA-AB4G

–+

+–

Relais fin de ligne

répertoriée et module surveillé

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+IN

/OU

T

SIGA-AB4GPremier dispositif Dernier dispositif

8 7 6

4 3 2 1

SIGA-CR

8 7 6 5

4 3 2 1

SIGA-CRR

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387021P REV: 7.0SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module 1 / 4

SIGA-CT1Single Input Module

Product description

1234

78

The SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module is a component of theSignature Series. The SIGA-CT1 is an analog addressabledevice used to connect a Class B, normally open, alarm,supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating device circuit(IDC) to a Signature loop controller. One device address isrequired.

The SIGA-CT1 can be used for alarm, supervisory, or monitortype applications. This is determined by a personality code thatis downloaded to the module by the loop controller duringsystem configuration.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CT1automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to themodule via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.



Mounting

The SIGA-CT1 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.


The SIGA-CT1 requires the Signature loop controller. The loopcontroller downloads the personality code which determineshow the module operates. The following personality codes canbe downloaded to the SIGA-CT1.

Personality code 1: N.O. alarm latching (Class B): Personalitycode 1 is assigned to input channels 1 and 2 at the factory.Personality code 1 configures the module for Class B normallyopen dry contact initiating devices (e.g., pull stations, heatdetectors, etc.). When the N.O. input contact of an initiatingdevice is closed, an alarm signal is sent to the loop controllerand the alarm condition is latched at the module.

Personality code 2: N.O. alarm delayed latching (Class B):Personality code 2 operates the same as personality code 1except that contact closure must be maintained forapproximately 16 seconds before an alarm signal is generated.Personality code 2 is only for use with non-retarded waterflowalarm switches.

Personality code 3: N.O. active non-latching (Class B): Acontact closure causes an active signal instead of an alarmsignal and does NOT latch at the module. Personality code 3 istypically used for monitoring fans, dampers, doors, etc.

Personality code 4: N.O. active latching (Class B): A contactclosure causes an active instead of an alarm event, which islatched at the module. Personality code 4 is typically used formonitoring supervisory and tamper switches.




SpecificationsOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcStandby current: 250 µAActivated current: 400 µAOperating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Construction: High impact engineering polymerShipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)Compatible electrical boxes


Initiating device circuit (IDC)EOL resistor value: 47 KΩ, UL listedMax. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)Max. circuit capacitiance (per channel): 0.1 µF

Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-CT1 is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.





P/N: 387021P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module



Notes





1/4 in (~6 mm)





Wiring diagram

(+)

(–)DATA OUT

Style B (Class B)[1] [2] [4]


TB2

TB1

Typical N.O.initiating device

UL/ULC listed47 k EOLΩ

Green LED(normal)

(+)

(–)

From Signature controlleror previous device [3] To next device

DATA IN

1234

78

Notes

[1] Maximum 25 Ω resistance per wire



[4] Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA

5. All wiring is power-limited and supervised

6. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387021P REV: 7.0SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module 3 / 4

SIGA-CT1Module à Une Seule Entrée


1234

78

Le Module à Une Seule Entrée SIGA-CT1 est un composant du SérieSignature. Le SIGA-CT1 est un dispositif analogique adressable utilisépour connecter un circuit de déclenchement (initiating device circuit, ouIDC) à contact sec normalement ouvert de Classe B, de type alarme,supervision, ou moniteur, à un contrôleur de boucle Signature. Uneadresse de dispositif est nécessaire.

Le SIGA-CT1 peut être utilisé pour des applications de type alarme,supervision, ou moniteur comme déterminé par le code depersonnalité téléchargé dans le module par le contrôleur de bouclependant la configuration du système.

Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement une adresse auSIGA-CT1 ou une adresse particulière peut être assignée au modulevia ordinateur portatif ; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé.

Des témoins à DEL donnent une indication visuelle de l’état du modulelorsque la plaque de protection est retirée:


Montage

Le SIGA-CT1 peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nordsimple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîtecarrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeuravec couvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0,et de 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de0,75 mm carrés sont préférables.


Le SIGA-CT1 est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs deboucle Signature. Le contrôleur de boucle télécharge le code depersonnalité déterminant comment le module fonctionne. Les codes depersonnalité suivants peuvent être téléchargés dans le SIGA-CT1.

Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d’alarme N.O. (Classe B): Lecode de personnalité 1 est assigné aux canaux d’entrée 1 et 2 dumodule lors de sa fabrication. Le code de personnalité 1 configure lemodule pour les dispositifs à contact sec normalement ouvert declasse B (postes à manette, détecteurs de chaleur, etc.). Lorsque lecontact d’entrée N.O. d’un dispositif de déclenchement se ferme, unsignal d’alarme est envoyé au contrôleur de boucle et la conditiond’alarme est verrouillée au niveau du module.

Code de personnalité 2: verrouillage d’alarme retardé N.O. (classeB): Le code de personnalité 2 fonctionne de la même façon que lecode de person-nalité 1, mais la fermeture du contact doit être

maintenue pendant environ 16 secondes pour générer un étatd’alarme. Le code de personnalité 2 n’est utilisé qu’avec desinterrupteurs d’alarme de débit d’eau non retardés.

Code de personnalité 3: non verrouillage d’activité N.O. (classe B):La fermeture d’un contact déclenche un état d’activité plutôt qu’un étatd’alarme et NE verrouille PAS au niveau du module. Le code depersonnalité 3 est habi-tuellement utilisé pour la surveillance desventilateurs, des registres, des portes, etc.

Code de personnalité 4: verrouillage d’activité N.O. (classe B): Lafermeture d’un contact déclenche un état d’activité plutôt qu’un étatd’alarme, verrouillé au niveau du module. Le code de personnalité 4est habituellement utilisé dans la surveillance des contacts desurveillance et des contacts de défaut.




CaractéristiquesTension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 VccCourant de veille: 250 µACourant de fonctionnement actif: 400 µAGamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 à 93 % HRGamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impactsPoids à la livraison: 145 g (5,1 oz)Boîtes électriques compatibles


Circuit de déclenchement (IDC)Résistance FDL: 47 KΩ, répertoriée ULRésistance de circuit maximum (par canal): 50 Ω (25 Ω par fil)Capacité de circuit maximum (par canal): 0,1 µF

InstallationNote: Le SIGA-CT1 est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il necontient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas êtredémonté.






P/N: 387021P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module


Notes




Dénudage des fils

~6 mm 1/4 po ( )





Schéma de câblage

(+)

(–)

TB2

TB1

(+)

(–)

[3]

1234

78

Au dispositif suivantDu contrôleur de boucle Signature ou du dispositif précédent

Témoin à DEL vert (Normal)

FDL 47 K , répertoriée

UL/ULC

Ω


Témoin à DEL rouge

(Alarme/Actif)

SORTIE DES DONNÉES

Style B (Classe B)[1] [2] [4]

Dispositif dedéclenchement

N.O. typique

Notes

[1] Résistance maximum: 25 Ω par fil

[2] Calibre de fil maximum: 2,5 mm carrés (AWG 12); minimum: 0,75mm carrés (AWG 18)


[4] Maximum 10 Vcc à 350 µA

5. Puissance limitée et contrôlée pour l’ensemble du câblage

6. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée à deux fils

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1912 REV: 2.0SIGA-CT1I - Single Input Module 1 / 2

SIGA-CT1ISingle Input Module

Product description

1234

78

The SIGA-CT1I Single Input Module is a component of theSignature Series. The SIGA-CT1I is an analog addressabledevice used to connect a Class B, normally open, alarm,supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating device circuit(IDC) to a Signature loop controller. One device address isrequired.

The SIGA-CT1I can be used for alarm, supervisory, or monitortype applications. This is determined by a personality code thatis downloaded to the module by the loop controller duringsystem configuration.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CT1Iautomatically. A custom address can also be assigned to themodule via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.



Mounting

The SIGA-CT1I can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.


The SIGA-CT1I requires the Signature loop controller. Theloop controller downloads the personality code whichdetermines how the module operates. The followingpersonality codes can be downloaded to the SIGA-CT1I.



Personality code 18: 4-state N.O. alarm latching (Class B):For Personality code 18, a contact closure causes an alarmstatus and a short condition causes a trouble status.Personality code 18 is typically used when a short conditionmust be distinguished from an alarm condition.







Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-CT1I is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.







Notes


P/N: P-047550-1912 REV: 2.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 2 SIGA-CT1I - Single Input Module



1/4 in (~6 mm)





Wiring diagrams

(+)

(–)DATA OUT



TB2

TB1



Green LED(normal)

(+)

(–)


[3]

To next device

DATA IN

1234

78

Personality codes 3 and 4

(+)

(–)DATA OUT



TB2

TB1



Green LED(normal)

(+)

(–)


[3]

To next device

DATA IN

1234

78

22 k resistorsΩ

Personality code 18

Notes







Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387037P REV: 8.0SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module 1 / 4

SIGA-CT2Dual Input Module

Product description

1234

5678

The SIGA-CT2 Dual Input Module is a component of theSignature Series. The SIGA-CT2 is an analog addressabledevice used to connect one or two Class B, normally open,alarm, supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating devicecircuits (IDCs) to a Signature loop controller. Two deviceaddresses are required.

The SIGA-CT2 can be used for alarm, supervisory, or monitortype applications. This is determined by a personality code thatis downloaded to the module by the loop controller duringsystem configuration.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CT2automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to themodule via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.



Mounting



The SIGA-CT2 requires the Signature loop controller. The loopcontroller downloads the personality code which determineshow the module operates. The following personality codes canbe downloaded to the SIGA-CT2.

Personality code 1: N.O. alarm latching (Class B): Personalitycode 1 is assigned to input channels 1 and 2 at the factory.Personality code 1 configures the module for Class B normallyopen dry contact initiating devices (e.g., pull stations, heatdetectors, etc.). When the N.O. input contact of an initiatingdevice is closed, an alarm signal is sent to the loop controllerand the alarm condition is latched at the module.










Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-CT2 is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.





P/N: 387037P REV: 8.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module



Notes





1/4 in (~6 mm)





Wiring diagram

(+)

(–)DATA OUT

INPUT 1 INPUT 2

UL/ULC Listed47 k EOLΩ



TB2

TB1



Green LED(normal)

(+)

(–)


DATA IN

1234

5678

Notes







Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387037P REV: 8.0SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module 3 / 4

SIGA-CT2Module à Double Entrée


1234

5678

Le Module à Double Entrée SIGA-CT2 est un composant du SérieSignature. Le SIGA-CT2 est un dispositif analogique adressable utilisépour connecter jusqu’à deux circuits de déclenchement (initiatingdevice circuit, ou IDC) à contact sec normalement ouvert de classe B,de type alarme, supervision ou moniteur, à un contrôleur de boucleSignature. Deux adresses de dispositif sont nécessaires.

Le SIGA-CT2 peut être utilisé pour des applications de type alarme,supervision, ou moniteur comme déterminé par le code depersonnalité téléchargé dans le module par le contrôleur de bouclependant la configuration du système. Le contrôleur de boucle assigneautomatiquement deux adresses au SIGA-CT2, ou deux adressesparticulières peuvent être assignées au module via ordinateur portatif.Aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé.



Montage

Le SIGA-CT2 peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nordsimple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîtecarrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeuravec couvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0,et de 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de0,75 mm carrés sont préférables.


Le SIGA-CT2 est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs deboucle Signature. Le contrôleur de boucle télécharge le code depersonnalité déterminant comment le module fonctionne. Les codes depersonnalité suivants peuvent être téléchargés dans le SIGA-CT2.

Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d’alarme N.O. (Classe B): Lecode de personnalité 1 est assigné aux canaux d’entrée 1 et 2 dumodule lors de sa fabrication. Le code de personnalité 1 configure lemodule pour les dispositifs à contact sec normalement ouvert declasse B (postes à manette, détecteurs de chaleur, etc.). Lorsque lecontact d’entrée N.O. d’un dispositif de déclenchement se ferme, unsignal d’alarme est envoyé au contrôleur de boucle et la conditiond’alarme est verrouillée au niveau du module.

Code de personnalité 2: verrouillage d’alarme retardé N.O. (classeB): Le code de personnalité 2 fonctionne de la même façon que lecode de person-nalité 1, mais la fermeture du contact doit êtremaintenue pendant environ 16 secondes pour générer un état

d’alarme. Le code de personnalité 2 n’est utilisé qu’avec desinterrupteurs d’alarme de débit d’eau non retardés.









InstallationNote: Le SIGA-CT2 est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il necontient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas êtredémonté.







P/N: 387037P REV: 8.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module

Notes




Dénudage des fils

~6 mm 1/4 po ( )





Schéma de câblage

1234

5678




UL/ULC

Ω

(+)

(–)

TB2

TB1

(+)

(–)

[3]



(Alarme/Actif)

SORTIE DES DONNÉES

ENTRÉE 1 ENTRÉE 2

FDL 47 K , répertoriée UL/ULC

Ω Style B (Classe B)[1] [2] [4]


N.O. typique

Notes







Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1913 REV: 2.0SIGA-CT2I - Dual Input Module 1 / 3

SIGA-CT2IDual Input Module

Product description

1234

5678

The SIGA-CT2I Dual Input Module is a component of theSignature Series. The SIGA-CT2I is an analog addressabledevice used to connect one or two Class B, normally open,alarm, supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating devicecircuits (IDCs) to a Signature loop controller. Two deviceaddresses are required.

The SIGA-CT2I can be used for alarm, supervisory, or monitortype applications. This is determined by a personality code thatis downloaded to the module by the loop controller duringsystem configuration.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CT2Iautomatically. A custom address can also be assigned to themodule via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.



Mounting

The SIGA-CT2I can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.


The SIGA-CT2I requires the Signature loop controller. Theloop controller downloads the personality code whichdetermines how the module operates. The followingpersonality codes can be downloaded to the SIGA-CT2I.



Personality code 18: 4-state N/O alarm latching (Class B):For personality code 18, a contact closure causes an alarmstatus and a short condition causes a trouble status.Personality code 18 is typically used when a short conditionmust be distinguished from an alarm condition.







Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-CT2I is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.







Notes


P/N: P-047550-1913 REV: 2.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 3 SIGA-CT2I - Dual Input Module




1/4 in (~6 mm)





Wiring diagrams

(+)

(–)DATA OUT

INPUT 1 INPUT 2




TB2

TB1



Green LED(normal)

(+)

(–)


DATA IN

1234

5678

Personality codes 3 and 4

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1913 REV: 2.0SIGA-CT2I - Dual Input Module 3 / 3

(+)

(–)DATA OUT




TB2

TB1



Green LED(normal)

(+)

(–)


DATA IN

1234

5678

INPUT 1 INPUT 2

22 kΩ 22 kΩ 22 kΩ 22 kΩ22 kΩ22 kΩ

Personality code 18

Notes


[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) wire

[3] Refer to the Signature loop controller installation sheet for wiring specifications




Installation Sheet 14APR04 P/N: 387317P REV: 3.0 SIGA-DG and SIGA-DGMF - Detector Guard with Optional Mounting Flange 1 / 2

SIGA-DG and SIGA-DGMF Detector Guard with Optional Mounting Flange

Product description

Detector Guard Mounting Flange (optional)

The SIGA-DG Detector Guard is a component of the Signature Series. The SIGA-DG is designed to prevent mechanical damage to Signature Series smoke detectors. Use of the guard does not affect detector performance and requires no detector sensitivity increase. See the table below for a list of compatible devices.

The optional SIGA-DGMF Mounting Flange is used to mount the detector guard to an electrical box or to a ceiling or wall surface. The mounting flange must be ordered separately.

Compatible devices

Detectors: GSA-PS, SIGA-IPHS, SIGA-IPHS-LG, SIGA-PS, SIGA-PS-LG, XLS-IPHS, XLS-PS

Bases: GSA-IB, GSA-RB, GSA-SB, SIGA-IB, SIGA-RB, SIGA-SB

Specifications Construction: 16 gauge steel Finished dimensions

Detector guard: 6.50 inch diameter x 3.25 inch height (16.5 cm x 8.26 cm) Mounting flange: 7.57 inch diameter x 1.56 inch height (19.2 cm x 3.96 cm)

Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mounted): 12 in (305 mm) Spacing: Listed detector spacing is not affected by the guard Finish: White enamel

Mounting the Detector Guard to a ceiling or wall surface 1. Fasten the detector base to an electrical box in the ceiling

or wall surface using appropriately sized screws (not provided).

2. Route the wiring through the hole in the detector base.

3. Wire the detector base in accordance with the instructions provided with the detector base, then connect the detector to the detector base.

4. Mount the Detector Guard over the detector and directly to the ceiling or wall surface using appropriately sized screws (not provided) for your application and surface type.

Note: The mounting holes in the detector guard provide clearance for up to a number 10 screw.

Ceiling or wallsurface

Detector guard

Detector base

Detector

Figure 1: Mounting the Detector Guard to a ceiling or wall surface

Mounting the Detector Guard to the Mounting Flange 1. Fasten the detector base to the Mounting Flange using the

two 8-32 machine screws that are provided.

2. Install the Mounting Flange on an electrical box or directly to the ceiling or wall surface using appropriately sized screws (not provided).

Note: The mounting holes in the Mounting Flange provide clearance for up to a number 10 screw and are positioned to fit a standard 4-inch square electrical box.



5. Mount the Detector Guard over the detector and to the Mounting Flange using the four 10-32 tamper-proof screws that are provided.

Mount to electrical box ordirectly to a ceiling or wall surface

Mounting flange

Detector guard

Detector base

Detector

Figure 2: Mounting the Detector Guard to the mounting flange

P/N: 387317P REV: 3.0 14APR04 Installation Sheet 2 / 2 SIGA-DG and SIGA-DGMF - Detector Guard with Optional Mounting Flange

Detector basemounting holes

Detector guardmounting holes

Electrical box orceiling or wall surface

mounting holes

Figure 3: Mounting Flange hole descriptions

INSTALLATION SHEET:

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387318P FILE NAME: 387318(R1.0).CDR

SIGA-DGS Surface Adapter

SIGA-DG Detector Guardfor use with the

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0

CREATED BY: R W2DATE: 04/11/97

APPROVED BY: RR

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS, CORP.SARASOTA, FL. 941-739-4300 Fax: 941-753-1806CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3075OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553

PRODUCT INFORMATION

The model SIGA-DG Detector Guard is designed to preventmechanical damage to surface mounted Signature Seriessmoke detectors when used with the SIGA-DGS surfaceadapter. Use of the guard does not affect detectorperformance, and requires no detector sensitivity increase.

The guard is finished in white enamel, and secured withtamper-proof fasteners.

SPECIFICATIONS

Construction 16 gauge steel

DimensionsSurface Adapter 8.875" diameter x 2.25" height

(22.54cm x 5.71cm)

Adapter & Guard 8.875" diameter x 5.5" height(22.54cm x 13.97cm)

Compatible DevicesDetectors

Bases

Spacing Listed detector spacing is notaffected by the guard

Finish White enamel

SIGA-IPHS XLS-IPHSSIGA-PS XLS-PS GSA-PS

SIGA-IB GSA-IBSIGA-RB GSA-RBSIGA-SB GSA-SB

INSTALLATION

1. Install the SIGA-DGS surface adapter (A) over theelectrical box/conduit using appropriate fasteners.Mounting holes provide clearance for a #10 screw.

2. Fasten the detector base (C) to the SIGA-DGmounting flange (B) using the two #8-32 machinescrews provided.

3. Install the mounting flange and detector base (B & C)on surface adapter, using four #8 bolts provided.Route the base wiring through the hole in the base.

4. Wire the base in accordance with the instructionsprovided with the base, then install the detector (D).

5. Secure the guard cage (E) to the mounting flangeusing the four tamper-proof bolts provided, andtighten securely.

DATE: 05APR00

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0




PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS

The SIGA-DGSA Surface Adapter is used to mount the SIGA-DG Detector Guard to a surface mount electrical box. The detector guard is designed to prevent mechanical damage to surface mounted Signature Series smoke detectors. Use of the guard does not affect detector performance, and requires no detector sensitivity increase.

The guard is finished in white enamel, and secured with tamper-proof fasteners.


Construction: 16 gauge steel

Dimensions

Surface adapter: 8.875 in diameter x 2.25 in height (22.54 cm x 5.71 cm)

Adapter and guard: 8.875 in diameter x 5.5 in height (22.54 cm x 13.97 cm)

Compatible devices



Spacing: Listed detector spacing is not affected by the guard

Finish: White enamel

1. Install the SIGA-DGSA surface adapter (A) over the electrical box/conduit using appropriate fasteners. Mounting holes provide clearance for a #10 screw.

2. Fasten the detector base (C) to the SIGA-DG mounting flange (B) using the two #8-32 machine screws provided.

3. Install the mounting flange and detector base (B and C) on surface adapter, using four #8 bolts provided. Route the base wiring through the hole in the base.

4. Wire the base in accordance with the instructions provided with the base, then install the detector (D).

5. Secure the guard cage (E) to the mounting flange using the four tamper-proof bolts provided, and tighten securely.

SIGA-DGSA Surface Adapter(for use with the SIGA-DG Detector Guard)


Adaptateur de surface SIGA-DGSAà utiliser avec le Dispositif de protection SIGA-DG

Construction: Acier de calibre nº 16

Dimensions

Adaptateur de surface: Diamètre de 22,54 cm x hauteur de 5,71 cm (8,875 po x 2,25 po)

Adaptateur et dispositif de protection: Diamètre de 22,54 cm x hauteur de 13,97 cm (8,875 po x 5,5 po)

Dispositifs compatibles

Détecteurs: GSA-PS, SIGA-IPHS, SIGA-IPHS-LG, SIGA-PS, SIGA-PS-LG, XLS-IPHS, XLS-PS


Espacement: L’espacement du détecteur listé n’est pas affecté par le dispositif de protection

Fini: Émail blanc

INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

INSTALLATION

L’adaptateur de surface SIGA-DGSA est utilisé pour monter le dis-positif de protection de détecteur SIGA-DG à une boîte électrique de montage en saillie. Le dispositif de protection de détecteur est conçue pour empêcher des dommages mécaniques aux détecteurs de fumée de la série Signature montés en saillie. L’utilisation du dispositif de protection n’affecte pas les performances du détecteur et n’exige pas d’augmenter la sensibilité du détecteur.

Le dispositif de protection est fini en émail blanc, et fixé avec des attaches de sécurité.

1. Installer l’adaptateur de surface (A) du SIGA-DGSA par dessus la boîte électrique / le conduit en utilisant les attaches qui con-viennent. Les trous de montage laissent un dégagement pour une vis nº 10.

2. Fixer la base du détecteur (C) à la bride de montage (B) du SIGA-DG en utilisant les deux vis mécaniques nº 8-32 fournies.

3. Installer la bride de montage et la base du détecteur (B et C) sur l’adaptateur de surface, en utilisant quatre boulons nº 8 fournis. Faire passer les fils de la base par le trou dans la base.

4. Câbler la base conformément aux instructions fournies avec la base, puis installer le détecteur (D).

5. Fixer la cage du dispositif de protection (E) à la bride de mon-tage en utilisant les quatre boulons de sécurité fournis, et serrer fermement.


FICHE RÉF: 3100084 FICHIER: 3100084.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 1.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right

CRÉÉ PAR: B. GrahamDATE: 05APR00


Installation Sheet 14APR04 P/N: 3100744 REV: 1.0 SIGA-DGSB - Detector Guard Surface Box 1 / 1

SIGA-DGSB Detector Guard Surface Box

Product description

The SIGA-DGSB Detector Guard Surface Box is a component of the Signature Series. The SIGA-DGSB is designed for use with the SIGA-DG Detector Guard to prevent mechanical damage to Signature Series smoke detectors. The SIGA-DGSB mounts directly to a ceiling or wall surface and provides a conduit knockout for surface mounted conduit. See the table below for a list of compatible devices.

Compatible devices



Specifications Construction: 16 gauge steel Finished dimensions: 7.57 inch diameter x 1.56 inch height

(19.2 cm x 3.96 cm) Spacing: Listed detector spacing is not affected by the guard Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mounted): 12 in (305 mm) Finish: White enamel

Installation instructions 1. Mount the detector base to the surface box using the two

8-32 machine screws provided.


3. Install the surface box on the wall or ceiling surface using appropriately sized screws (not provided).

Note: The mounting holes on the surface box provide clearance for up to a number 10 screw.


5. Mount the detector guard over the detector and to the surface box using the four 10-32 tamper-proof screws that are provided.

Ceiling or wallsurface

Surface box

Detector guard

Detector base

Detector

Figure 1: Mounting the surface box and detector guard

Detector basemounting holes

Detector guardmounting holes

Ceiling or wallmounting holes

Figure 2: Surface box hole descriptions

DATE: 31AUG00

FILE NAME: P-847550-1723.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 3.0

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan


SIGA-DHDuct Detector Housing Assembly

INSTALLATION SHEET:

PRODUCT INFORMATION

DESCRIPTIONThe Signature Series duct detector housing assembly, Model SIGA-DH, is designed for mounting in an air duct to detect the presence ofsmoke in the airstream of duct work sections of the HVAC air handlingsystems typically used in commercial buildings. The duct detector is notintended to be a substitute for an open area smoke detector.

1) For proper operation, ONLY the specified detectors should beused with this mounting plate. Adetector that is not rated for the airvelocities produced in air ducts will NOT operate properly and mayresult in loss of life.

SPECIFICATIONS

Compatible Bases

Compatible Detectors

Compatible Remote Annunciator

Operating Humidity Range

Air Velocity Range

SIGA-PHS, -PS

SIGA-IPHS, -IPHSB

Construction

Shipping Weight

Air Sampling Tubes

Cat. No. Length

SIGA-SBSIGA-RBSIGA-IB

SIGA-PSSIGA-PHSSIGA-IPHS

SIGA-LED

0 - 93% RH

300 - 4,000 ft/min.(1.524 - 20.312 m/s)

300 - 1,000 ft/min.

(1.524 - 5.08 m/s)

Steel, High-Gloss Red

5.38 lbs. (2.4 kg)

6261-001 8" (0.2 m)6261-002 2' (0.6 m)6261-003 3'-6" (1.0 m)6261-006 6'-6" (1.9 m)6261-010 10' (3.0 m)

NOTE


The duct detector housing assembly should be installed in accordancewith NFPA 72 and the authorities having jurisdiction. The preferredlocation of the housing is in a length of straight duct at least six duct widthsfrom any bends or other obstructions as shown

WARNINGS

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-847550-1723

1) Select the location for the duct housing and apply the adhesivebacked drill template on the duct. Drill out the 4 mounting holes andthe (2) 1 5/8" (41 mm) diameter holes for the air sampling andexhaust tubes. If the air stream is in the opposite direction to thatshown, invert the duct housing.

2) Insert the appropriate air sampling tube (not supplied) in the 1 5/8"(41 mm) diameter hole. Orient the tube so that the air flows into theinlet holes along the side of the tube. If the air sampling tube islonger than the duct, either cut the end of the tube to fit inside theduct or drill a clearance hole in the opposite duct wall and allow thetube to protrude outside the duct. Insert the rubber stopper(supplied) into the far end of the sampling tube.

3) Insert the exhaust tube into the red connector on the housingoriented with the slanted edge facing downstream. Tighten thescrew on the connector.

4) Bring the duct housing up to the air sampling tube, keeping thesampling holes oriented directly into the air flow. Insert the end ofthe tube into the connector on the housing and tighten the screw onthe connector.

5) Secure the housing to the duct using the four #8 screws provided.If sampling tube is wider than the duct, seal all potential air leaks onopposite side of duct from around air sampling tube, includingexposed inlet holes, with duct seal.

6) Remove knockouts from duct detector housing as required. Installconduit and bring the field wiring into the housing. Leave at least12" (305 mm) of slack field wiring extending from the conduit formaking the wiring connections.

7) Connect the green ground wire provided on the detector housing toan appropriate ground. Wire the detector base in accordance withthe instructions supplied with the base. Secure the base to theadapter plate using two #8-32 screws (supplied).

8) Mate the detector to the base by rotating the detector on the baseuntil it stops.

9) Insert the detector assembly into the smoke chamber in the ducthousing, aligning the locating pin on the smoke chamber with thehole in the adapter plate. Secure the plate to the smoke chamberusing two #8-32 x 3/8" (0.95 mm) screws (supplied).

10) Measure air velocity using the Cat. No. 6263-SG Air Velocity TestKit.

11) Rectangular knockouts are provided on the top, bottom, right, andfront cover of the duct housing for mounting optional modules. Themodules are mounted on 1-gang stainless steel plates that fastento the duct housing. For more information, refer to the InstallationInstructions provided with each module.

12) For testing information, refer to the applicable duct detectorinstallation instructions.


P/N: P-847550-1723 REV: 3.0 Page 2 of 4

FIGURE 1: SIGA-DH

NeopreneGasketAttachedTo Housing

Locating PinDo Not Bend!

Exhaust Tube(supplied)Orient WithSlant DirectedAway FromAirflow

Red ExhaustTubeConnector

Air SamplingTube

Connector

AIR DUCTAIR DUCT

SmokeChamber

Detector

Front Cover

Adapter Plate

Base

AIR DUCT AIRFLOW

Rubber StopperMust Be Installed

Into End OfSampling Tube

Air Inlet SamplingTube (Orient WithAir Holes Facing

Airflow)

DATE: 31AUG00

NOM DU FICHIER : P-847550-1723.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 3.0

CRÉÉ PAR : C. Hanrahan

APPROUVÉ PAR : B. Right

SIGA-DHBoîtier de détecteur sur conduit

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

PRODUC T INFORMATIONINFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT

DESCRIPTIONLe boîtier de détecteur sur conduit, modèle SIGA-DH, est conçu pour êtreinstallé dans un conduit d’air de façon à détecter la présence de fumée dansle courant d’air des sections du réseau de conduits des systèmes declimatisation dans les bâtiments commerciaux. Le détecteur sur conduit

1) Pour assurer un bon fonctionnement, N’utiliser QUE les détecteursspécifiés avec cette plaque de montage. Un détecteur qui n’est pashomo-logué pour les vitesses d’écoulement d’air produites dans lesconduits d’air NE fonctionnera PAS correctement ce qui pourrait


Bases compatibles

Détecteurs compatibles

Indicateur à distance compatible

Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement

Gamme de vitesses d’air

Construction

Poids à la livraison

Tubes d’échantillonnage d’air

SIGA-SBSIGA-RBSIGA-IB

SIGA-PSSIGA-PHSSIGA-IPHS

SIGA-LED

0 - 93 % HR

SIGA-PHS, -PS 1,524 - 20,312 m/s(300 - 4 000 pi/min)

SIGA-IPHS, -IPHSB 1,524 - 5,08 m/s(300 - 1 000 pi/min)

Acier, rouge brillant

2,4 kg (5,38 livres)

N de cat. Longueur6261-001 0,2 m (8 po)6261-002 0,6 m (2 pi)6261-003 1,0 m (3 pi 6 po)6261-006 1,9 m (6 pi 6 po)

°

NOTE


Le boîtier de détecteur pour conduit doit être installé conformément à lanorme NFPA 72 et aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Le boîtier doitêtre installé de préférence dans une section rectiligne de conduit, à unedistance égale à au moins six fois la largeur du conduit, à partir de tout coude

AVERTISSEMENTS

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : P-847550-1723

1) Appliquer le gabarit autocollant à l’endroit choisi sur le conduit. Percerles 4 trous de montage et les deux trous de 1-5/8 po (41 mm) pour lestubes d’échantillonage et d’échappement. Si l’air s écoule dans le sensopposé à celui indiqué sur le schéma, inverser l’orientation du boîtier.

: La figure 1 illustre les étapes décrites dans cette marche àsuivre.

2) Insérer le tube d’échantillonnage approprié (à commanderséparément) dans le trou de 1-5/8 po (41 mm) de diamètre. Le tube doitêtre orienté de façon à ce que l’air entre par les orificesd’échantillonnage percés le long du tube. Si le tube est plus long que leconduit, le couper de façon à ce qu il entre dans le conduit ou percer untrou de dégagement dans la paroi opposée du conduit et laisser le tubedépasser du conduit. Utiliser le bouchon de caoutchouc pour obturerl’extrémité du tube.

3) Insérer le tube d’échappement dans le raccord rouge en l’orientant defaçon à ce que sa face biseautée soit tournée du côté aval du courantd’air. Serrer la vis du raccord.

4) Placer le boîtier de façon à ce que le raccord pour le tubed’échantillonnage vienne à hauteur de celui-ci, tout en maintenant lesorifices de prélèvement d’air fac au courant d’air. Insérer l’extrémité dutube dans le raccord situé sur le boîtier, puis serrer la vis du raccord.

5) Fixer le boîtier sur le conduit au moyen des quatre vis n 8 fournies àcette fin. Si le tube d’échantillonnage est plus long que la largeur duconduit, enduire de produit d’étanchéité pour conduit le pourtout del’orifice où le tube traverse la paroi opposée du conduit, de façon àobturer toutes les fuites possibles, y compris les orificesd’échantillonnage qui sont exposés.

6) Retirer les débouchures appropriées du boîtier et y insérer le conduitélectrique pour faire passer le câblage externe à l’intérirur du boîtier.Laisser dépasser au moins 12 po (305 mm) de fil au bout du conduitpour les raccordements.

7) Raccorder le fil vert de mise à la terre du boîtier de détecteur à une prisede terre adéquate. Brancher le câblage de la base du détecteurconformément aux instructions fournies avec cette base. Fixer la basesur la plaque adaptatrice au moyen de deux vis n 8-32 fournies.

8) Accoupler le détecteur à la base en faisant tourner le détecteur sur labase jusqu’à ce qu’il s’arrête.

9) Insérer l’ensemble du détecteur dans la chambre de fumée du boîtier,en alignant le goujon d’assemblage de la chambre de fumée avec letrou de la plaque adaptatrice. Fixer la plaque adaptatrice à la chambrede fumée en utilisant deux vis n 8-32 x 3/8 po (0,95 mm) fournies.

10) Mesurer la vitesse d’écoulement de l’air à l’aide du Nécessaire demesure de vitesse de l’air (n de catalogue 6263 - SG).

11) Le boîtier comporte sur le dessus, le dessous, le côté droit et à l’avantdes débouchures rectangulaires pour l’installation de modulesoptionnels. Ces modules sont montés sur des plaques simples en acierpermettant de les fixer sur le boîtier pour conduit. Pour plus de détails,se référer aux instructions d’installation de chacun de ces modules.

12) Pour l’essai des détecteurs, consulter la notice d’installation fournieavec le détecteur utilisé.

Remarque

°

°

°

°

Coude ou autreobstruction

6 fois (minimum)la largeur du conduit

Emplacement dudétecteur pour conduit

Largeur du conduit

P/N: P-847550-1723 REV: 3.0 Page 3 of 4


P/N: P-847550-1723 REV: 3.0 Page 4 of 4

FIGURE 1: SIGA-DH

Joint de néoprènefixé au boîtier

Goujon d’assemblageNe pas le tordre !

Tube d’échappement (fourni)Orienter la face biseautéedu tube du côté aval ducourant d’air

Raccord rouge pourtube d’échappement

Raccord pour tubed’échantillonnage de l’air

BOÎTIER D’AIRBOÎTIER D’AIR

Chambrede fumée

Détecteur

Couvercle avant

Plaque adaptatrice

Base

BOÎTIER D’AIR COURANT D’AIR

Bouchon de caoutchoucDoit être inséré au bout

du tube d’échantillonnage

Tube d’échantillonnage(Orienter les trous de

prélèvement de l’airface au courant d’air)

FIGURE 1 : SIGA-DH

Electrical box (included): Standard 4 in (102 mm) square box 1 1/2 in (38 mm)deep w/1-gang cover

Compatible bases: SB, RB, IB

Compatible detectors: PS, PHS, IPHS

Compatible remote annunciator: LED

Duct wall thickness: Up to 3/4 in (1.905 cm)

Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH

Air velocity range:

PS, PHS 0 to 5,000 ft/min. (0 to 25.39 m/s)

IPHS 0 to 500 ft/min. (0 to 2.54 m/s)

Construction: Steel, high-gloss red

Shipping weight: 2.7 lbs (1.2 kg)


PRODUCT DIAGRAM

DATE: 090200

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 6.0

FILE NAME: CDR387053P.

CREATED BY: S. Hawes

APPROVED BY: S. Jaskiel


1)

2) Using the template provided on the reverse side of this sheet, drill eight(8) 1/16 in (0.158 cm) holes and cut out the 4 3/4 in (12.065 cm) circle.

3) Make sure the holes in the duct correctly align with the holes in the DMP.

4) Remove the appropriate conduit knockout on the DMP.

5) Mount the base to the DMP as shown and wire the base according to theinstructions provided with the base.

6) Choose installation option and mount in accordance with diagram.

7) Mount the DMP to the duct using eight #8-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tappingscrews (provided).

Refer to Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.

Compatible Detector

Compatible Base

Duct DetectorMounting Plate,DMP

LED

Blank Cover Plateand Control RelayModule, CR

Blank Cover PlateOption 3

Option 2 OR

Option 1 OR

INSTALLATION OPTIONSFor all 3 options,

DMP may bemounted on either

side of duct.

Installation OptionsRemote LED Alarm Indicator (LED)mounted directly to DMP

1

2.8" (7.11 cm)

Up to 36 in(91.44 cm)Maximum

Side

Bottom

Center Line

Up to 36 in (91.44 cm) MaximumUp to 72 in (182.88 cm) Maximum

if 2 detectors are used

ALARM

8

4

7 6

3 2 1

Control Relay Module(CR) mounted directlyto DMP

2

LEDmountedat remotelocation

ALARM

2.8 in (7.11 cm)Up to 36 in(91.44 cm)Maximum

Center Line

Up to 36 in (91.44 cm) Maximum

Blank Cover Plate(standard electrical supply)mounted to DMP

3

LEDmountedat remotelocation

ALARM

2.8 in (7.11 cm)Up to 36 in(91.44 cm)Maximum

Center Line

Up to 36 in (91.44 cm) Maximum

PRODUCT INFORMATIONThe Duct Detector Mounting Plate, Model DMP, is a component of theSignature Series used to mount a smoke detector inside an air duct. The DMPprovides screws for mounting the detector base and includes a rubber gasketwhich forms an airtight seal between the mounting plate and the duct.

Refer to the Installation Sheets provided with the detector, base, Remote LEDAlarm Indicator (LED), and/or control relay module for specific wiringinstructions.

WARNINGS1) For proper operation, ONLY the specified detectors should be used with

this mounting plate. A detector that is not rated for the air velocitiesproduced in air ducts will NOT operate properly and may result in loss oflife.

2) The DMP is intended for use ONLY in the three configurations shown inInstallation Options. For other duct sizes, refer to the appropriatemanufacturer's documentation.

3) Do NOT mount the DMP on the bottom side of a duct. This position willresult in excessive dirt buildup in the detector and affect proper operation.

SPECIFICATIONS

SIGA-DMPDuct Detector Mounting Plate

RELATED DOCUMENTS: Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145)

1/16" (0.158 cm) diameter hole (8 required)

4 3/4" (12.065 cm)diameter hole

DRILL TEMPLATE FOR DUCT DETECTOR MOUNTING PLATE, SIGA-DMP

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

DATE: 090200


FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF.: 387053P


FICHIER: 387053P.CDR

CRÉÉ PAR: S. Hawes

APPROUVÉ PAR: S. Jaskiel


DOCUMENTATION SUPPLÉMENTAIRE: Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145)


1) Se référer à la brochure technique pour les instructions d’installation.

2) En utilisant le gabarit fourni au recto de cette fiche, percer huit (8) trousde 0,158 cm (1/16 po) et découper le cercle de 12,065 cm (4-3/4 po).

3) Vérifier que les trous de conduit sont bien dans l’alignement de ceux de laplaque DMP.

4) Enlever la débouchure de conduit appropriée de la plaque DMP.

5) Monter la base sur la plaque DMP comme illustré sur le schéma ci-dessous et câbler la base selon la fiche d installation qui l’accompagne.

6) Choisir l’option d’installation et faire le montage suivant le schéma.

7) Fixer le DMP sur le conduit d’air au moyen de huit vis autotaraudeuses n8-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm) (fournies).

°

OPTIONS D’INSTALLATION

1ALARM

7,11 cm (2,8 po)

Ligne d’axe

Maximum 91,44 cm (36 po)Maximum 182,88 cm (72 po) si

étecteurs sont utilisésDeux d

Maximum91,44 cm(36 po)

Témoin à DEL à distance(LED) monté directement sur DMP

Pour les trois options,DMP peut être montée

sur n’importe quelleparoi du conduit

Côté

Fond


8

4

7 6

3 2 1

2

ALARM

7,11 cm(2,8 po)

Ligne d’axe

Maximum 91,44 cm (36 po)

Module ‘relais de commande’(CR) monté directement surDMP

LED montéà un endroitéloigné


3Plaque de protection vierge(alimentation électriquestandard) montée surDMP

Maximum 91,44 cm (36 po)Ligne d’axe

7,11 cm(2,8 po)

ALARM

LED montéà un endroitéloigné

Détecteur compatible

Base compatible

Plaque de montagede détecteur pourconduit, DMP

LED

Plaque de pro-tection viergeet module ‘relaisde commande’,CR

Plaque deprotection vierge

Option 3

Option 2 OU

Option 1 OU

INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUITLa plaque de montage de détecteur pour conduit modèle DMP est un composantdu Série Signature et est utilisée pour monter un détecteur de fumée à l’intérieurd’un conduit d’air. Elle comprend des vis de montage pour la base du détecteur etun joint de caoutchouc qui assure l’étanchéité entre la plaque de montage et leconduit.Se référer aux fiches d’installation fournies avec le détecteur, la base, le témoin àDEL à distance et/ou le module ‘relais de commande’ pour les instructions spéci-fiques de câblage.

AVERTISSEMENTS1) Pour un fonctionnement correct, utiliser cette plaque de montage

UNIQUE-MENT avec les détecteurs spécifiés. Un détecteur non classépour les vitesses d’air produites dans les conduits d’air NEFONCTIONNERA PAS correctement et peut conduire à la perte de vieshumaines.

2) Le DMP doit être utilisé UNIQUEMENT dans les trois configurationsillustrées dans la section Options d’installation. Pour les autres tailles deconduit, se référer à la documentation du fabricant appropriée.

3) NE PAS monter la plaque DMP sur la paroi de fond d’un conduit. Cetteposition résulterait en un empoussièrage excessif du détecteur etempêcherait son fonctionnement correct.

SPÉCIFICATIONSBoîte électrique (comprise): Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm de côté et de38,1 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur avec couvercle simple standard

Bases compatibles: SB,RB, IB

Détecteurs compatibles: PS, PHS, IPHS

Indicateur à distance compatible: LED

Épaisseur des parois du conduit: Jusqu’à 1,905 cm (0,75 po)

Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 - 93 % HR

Gamme de vitesses d’air:

PS, PHS 0 à 25,39 m/s (0 à 5,000 pi/min)

IPHS 0 à 2,54 m/s (0 à 500 pi/min)

Construction et fini: Acier, rouge brillant


SIGA-DMPPlaque de montage de détecteur pour conduit

Trou de diamètre 0,158 cm (1/16 po) (8 trous à percer)

Trou de diamètre12,065 cm (4-3/4 po)

GABARIT DE PERÇAGE DE LA PLAQUE DE DÉTECTEUR DE CONDUIT, SIGA-DMP

Pro

du

ctIn

form

atio

nIn

stal

lati

on

Inst

ruct

ion

s

WA

RN

ING

S

No

tes

Sp

ecif

icat

ion

s

Tab

leA

-Te

chn

ical

Do

cum

enta

tio

n

P/N

Titl

e

Sig

natu

reS

eries

Tech

nic

alR

efe

rence

Manual

Inst

alla

tion

&P

reve

ntiv

eM

ain

tenance

Guid

e

Sys

tem

Opera

tions

Guid

e

270144

270186

270188

ED

WA

RD

SS

YS

TE

MS

TE

CH

NO

LO

GY

SA

RA

SO

TA,

FL

80

0-6

55

-44

97

Fa

x.9

41

-75

3-1

80

6C

HE

SH

IRE

,C

T2

03

-69

9-3

00

0F

ax.

20

3-6

99

-30

75

OW

EN

SO

UN

D,

CA

NA

DA

51

9-3

76

-24

30

Fa

x.5

19

-37

6-7

25

8IN

TE

RN

AT

ION

AL

:C

AN

AD

A9

05

-67

8-6

76

7F

ax.

90

5-6

78

-97

91

SIG

A-D

TS

DU

CT

DE

TE

CT

OR

TE

ST

STA

TIO

N

PA

RT

NO

.:P

-847

550-

1739

ISS

UE

:2

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NT

he

Duct

Dete

ctor

Test

Sta

tion,

Model

SIG

A-D

TS

,is

an

analo

gaddre

ssable

com

ponento

fthe

Sig

natu

reS

eries

Sys

tem

.O

ne

(1)

devi

ceaddre

ssis

required.

The

SIG

A-D

TS

isa

norm

ally

-open

dry

conta

ctsi

gnali

niti

atin

gdevi

ceth

atr

equires

only

one

act

ion

by

the

use

rin

ord

er

toin

itiate

an

ala

rm.

The

single

input

module

superv

ises

the

keys

witc

hand

sends

an

ala

rmsi

gnalt

oth

elo

op

contr

olle

rwhen

the

switc

his

turn

ed

toth

ete

stposi

tion.

When

the

syst

em

ass

oci

ate

dw

ithth

elo

op

contr

olle

rre

ceiv

es

the

ala

rmsi

gnal,

the

act

ion

ass

oci

ate

dw

ithth

eS

IGA

-DT

Sand

the

duct

mounte

dsm

oke

dete

ctor

isperf

orm

ed.

(All

outp

uts

tobe

act

ivate

dor

funct

ions

tobe

perf

orm

ed

by

the

syst

em

are

carr

ied

out.)

The

loop

contr

olle

rass

igns

an

addre

ssto

the

SIG

A-D

TS

auto

matic

ally

,ora

cust

om

addre

ssca

nbe

ass

igned

toth

est

atio

nvi

ala

pto

pco

mpute

r;no

addre

ssin

gsw

itches

are

use

d.

Refe

rto

Sig

natu

reS

eries

IOM

CM

anual

(P/N

270144)

for

deta

ilson

auto

matic

and

cust

om

addre

ssin

g.

Dia

gnost

icLE

Ds

pro

vide

visi

ble

indic

atio

nof

the

statu

sof

the

statio

n,w

hen

the

unit

isre

move

dfr

om

the

ele

ctrica

lbox.

The

term

inalb

lock

will

acc

ept

#14,

16

or

18

AW

Gw

ire

(1.5

mm

,1.0

mm

,0.7

5m

m).

Siz

es

#16

and

#18

are

pre

ferr

ed.

The

SIG

A-D

TS

requires

the

Sig

natu

reLoop

Contr

olle

r.

The

SIG

A-D

TS

isfa

ctory

ass

igned

pers

onalit

yco

de

1w

hic

hco

nfig

ure

sth

eS

IGA

-DT

Sfo

rC

lass

Bopera

tion.

When

the

keys

witc

his

act

ivate

d,

an

ala

rmsi

gnal

isse

nt

toth

eLoop

Contr

olle

rand

the

ala

rmco

nditi

on

isla

tched

att

he

SIG

A-D

TS

.

2

22

SY

ST

EM

CO

NT

RO

LL

ER

CO

MP

AT

IBIL

ITY

PE

RS

ON

AL

ITY

CO

DE

1:N

/OA

LA

RM

LA

TC

HIN

G(C

LA

SS

B)

Sta

tus

LE

DIn

dic

ato

r

Norm

al

Ala

rm/A

ctiv

e

Gre

en

LE

Dfla

shes.

Red

LE

Dfla

shes.

1)

This

test

statio

nw

illN

OT

opera

tew

ithout

ele

ctrica

lpow

er.

As

fires

frequently

cause

pow

eri

nte

rruptio

n,d

iscu

ssfu

rther

safe

guard

sw

ithyo

url

oca

lfire

pro

tect

ion

speci

alis

t.

1)

2)

Verify

that

all

field

wirin

gis

free

of

opens,

short

s,and

gro

und

faults

.

3)

Make

all

wirin

gco

nnect

ions

as

show

nin

the

wirin

gdia

gra

m.

4)

Write

the

addre

ssass

igned

toth

em

odule

on

the

label

pro

vided

and

apply

the

labelt

oth

em

odule

.P

eelo

ffth

ere

mova

ble

serialn

um

berl

abelf

rom

the

module

and

apply

itto

the

appro

priate

loca

tion

inth

eS

erial

Num

ber

Logbook.

5)

Usi

ng

the

four

6-3

2x

3/8

"(9

.5m

m)

mach

ine

scre

ws

pro

vided,m

ountt

he

module

toth

eele

ctrica

lbox.

6)

Usi

ng

the

four

4-2

4x

5/1

6"

(7.9

mm

)se

lf-ta

ppin

gsc

rew

spro

vided,m

ountt

he

wall

pla

teto

the

module

.

1)

Wir

ein

acc

ord

an

cew

ithN

FP

A7

0-1

99

6,

Na

tion

al

Ele

ctri

cal

Co

de

Art

icle

76

0,

Se

ctio

n7

60

-54

(a)(

1),

Exc

eptio

nN

o.2

and

3.

Th

eS

IGA

-DT

Sis

ship

ped

fro

mth

efa

cto

ryas

anas

sem

ble

du

nit

;it

con

tain

sn

ou

ser-

serv

icea

ble

par

tsan

dsh

ou

ldN

OT

be

dis

asse

mb

led

.

NO

TE

:

1R

efe

rto

Sig

natu

reLoop

Contr

olle

rIn

stalla

tion

Sheet

for

wirin

gsp

eci

ficatio

ns.

2A

llw

irin

gpow

er-

limite

dand

superv

ised.

Wir

eS

trip

pin

gG

uid

e

Str

ip1/4

"fr

om

the

ends

ofA

LL

wires

thatco

nnect

toth

ete

rmin

alb

lock

ofth

em

odule

.

CA

UT

ION

:E

xpo

sin

gE

xpo

sin

gm

ore

less

than

1/4

"ofw

ire

may

cause

agro

und

fault.

than

1/4

"ofw

ire

may

resu

ltin

afa

ulty

connect

ion.

Op

erat

ing

Vo

ltag

eR

ang

e

Sta

nd

by

Cu

rren

t

Act

ivat

edC

urr

ent

Op

erat

ing

Tem

per

atu

reR

ang

e

Op

erat

ing

Hu

mid

ity

Ran

ge

Sto

rag

eTe

mp

erat

ure

Ran

ge

Co

mp

atib

leE

lect

rica

lBo

xes

Co

nst

ruct

ion

15.2

-19.9

5V

dc

250

A

400

A

+32

to+

100

F(0

to+

38

C)

0-

93%

RH

-4to

+140

F(-

20

to+

60

C)

Nort

hA

merica

n2-1

/2"

(64

mm

)D

eep

2-G

ang

Box

Sta

ndard

4"

Square

Box

1-1

/2"

(38

mm

)D

eep

Box

Euro

pean

100

mm

Square

Box

Hig

hIm

pact

Engin

eering

Poly

mer

°°

°°

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387017P REV: 8.0 SIGA-HFS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector 1 / 2

SIGA-HFS Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector

Product description

Tamper-reist lever armBreak off to disable

(located on base)

Access slot for tamper-resist mechanism

Description: The Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector (SIGA-HFS) is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device contains a fixed-temperature heat sensor to detect heat from fire. The heat sensor monitors the temperature of the air in its surroundings and the detector analyzes the data and determines whether an alarm should be initiated. A heat detector by itself, however, does not provide life safety protection. For life safety situations, a heat detector should be used in conjunction with ionization or photoelectric smoke detectors or a combination thereof.

LEDs: The SIGA-HFS has two LEDs to indicate detector status:

• Normal: Green LED flashes • Alarm: Red LED flashes • Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously

Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to the detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.

Stand-alone operation: If isolated from the loop controller, the detector alarms when heat levels exceed a preset value. See the applicable control panel manual to verify standalone capabilities.

Self-diagnostics: The SIGA-HFS contains a microprocessor capable of performing comprehensive self-diagnostic tests and storing results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile memory. These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired.

Specifications Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Normal operating current: 45 µA Alarm current: 45 µA Standalone alarm current: 18 mA ULI fixed-temp alarm rating: 135 °F (57 °C) ULC fixed-temp alarm rating: 140 °F (60 °C) Actual alarm point: 130 to 140 °F (54 to 60 °C) Operating environment

Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C) Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing

Compatible bases Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Maximum spacing: 70 ft (21.3 m) centers Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g) Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Warnings 1. This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires

frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

2. This detector will not sense fires that start in areas where heat cannot reach the detector. Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.

3. This detector is intended for use with ionization and/or photoelectric smoke detectors. The heat detector by itself does not provide life safety protection.

4. This detector will not detect oxygen levels, smoke, toxic gases, or flames. This device should only be used as part of a broad based life safety program which includes a variety of information sources pertaining to heat and smoke levels, extinguishment systems, visual and audible devices, and other safety measures.

5. Independent studies indicate that heat detectors should only be used when property protection alone is involved. Under no circumstances should heat detectors be relied on as the sole means of fire protection.

6. Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in accordance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC Standard CAN 536.

See Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for cleaning instructions.

7. The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) must remain on the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to operation. The dust cover is not a substitute for removing the detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.

8. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room temperature before applying power.

Installation instructions 1. Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot and

rotate the detector counterclockwise to remove it. Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.

2. See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.

3. Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet supplied with the base.

4. Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

5. Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise until it snaps into the locked position.

6. NFPA code requires that a calibrated sensitivity test be performed upon completion of the original installation and following any modifications or additions to the system. The Signature Series can perform this test and generate a system sensitivity report.

7. In Canada your installation must meet the requirements of CAN/ULC-S524-M91: Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, and the local authority having jurisdiction.

8. Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.

P/N: 387017P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet 2 / 2 SIGA-HFS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector

SIGA-HFS Détecteur de chaleur intelligent à température fixe

Informations sur le produit

Levier de verrouillage- Casser pour mettre hors

service - (situé sur la base)

Fente d'accès du mécanisme de verrouillage

Description: Le détecteur de chaleur intelligent à température fixe (SIGA-HFS) est l’un des composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent comprend un capteur thermique à température fixe pour la détection de la chaleur générée par un incendie. Le capteur thermique surveille la température de l’air environnant et le détecteur analyze les données et détermine ainsi si une alarme doit être déclenchée. Un détecteur de chaleur seul, cependant, ne fournit pas une protection des vies humaines. Pour assurer une telle protection, un détecteur de chaleur doit être utilisé en conjonction avec des capteurs de fumée à ionisation ou photoélectrique ou combinant ces deux technologies.

Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-HFS comprend deux témoins à DEL indiquant l'état du détecteur:

• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote • Alarme: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote • Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins allumés de façon continue

Adressage électronique: Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement des adresses aux détecteurs, ou des adresses spéciales peuvent être assignées aux détecteurs via un ordinateur portatif. Aucun commutateur d'adressage n'est utilisé.

Fonctionnement autonome: En cas de panne de communication avec le contrôleur de boucle, le détecteur déclenche une alarme lorsque le niveau de chaleur dépasse un seuil pré-établi. Se référer au manuel pertinent du panneau de contrôle d'alarme d'incendie afin de vérifier les possibilités du fonctionnement autonome.

Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-HFS contient un microprocesseur capable d'effectuer une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser les résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, la dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment.

Caractéristiques techniques Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à19,95 Vcc Courant de veille: 45 µA Courant d'alarme: 45 µA Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA Seuil de température fixe ULI: 57 ºC (135 ºF) Seuil de température fixe ULC: 60 ºC (140 ºF) Point d’alarme réel: 54 à 60 ºC (130 à 140 ºF) Environnement de fonctionnement

Température: 0 à 38 ºC (32 à 100 ºF) Humidité: 0 à 93% HR - sans condensation

Bases compatibles Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G

Espacement maximum: Centres de 21,3 m (70 pi) Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz) Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

Avertissements 1. Ce dispositif ne fonctionne pas en l'absence de courant électrique. Les

incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.

2. Ce détecteur ne peut pas détecter les incendies se déclarant dans un endroit où la chaleur ne peut pas l'atteindre. La chaleur dégagée par un feu à l'intérieur d'un mur, d'un toit ou de l'autre côté de portes fermées peut ne pas atteindre le détecteur.

3. Ce détecteur est prévu pour être utilisé avec des détecteurs de fumée à ionisation ou photoélectriques. Le détecteur thermique n’assure pas à lui seul la protection des vies humaines.

4. Ce détecteur ne détectera pas la teneur en oxygène, la fumée, les gaz toxiques ou les flammes. Il ne devrait être utilisé que comme élément d’un programme de protection plus étendu comprenant une variété de sources d’informations sur la quantité de chaleur et de fumée, des systèmes d’extinction, des dispositifs sonores et visuels ainsi que d’autres moyens de protection.

5. D’après des études indépendantes, les détecteurs thermiques ne devraient être utilisés que pour la protection des biens. On ne devrait, en aucun cas, utiliser des détecteurs thermiques comme seul moyen de protection.

6. Un entretien (régulier ou particulier) est nécessaire pour assurer le bon fonctionnement du système. Cet entretien doit être planifié conformément aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Se référer aux normes NFPA 72 et CAN/ULC 536.

Pour des renseignements supplémentaires et les instructions de nettoyage, se référer au Bulletin Technique P/N 270145.

7. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est PAS suffisant pour protéger le détecteur lors de travaux de construction ou de réaménagement.

8. Pour assurer un bon fonctionnement, stocker le détecteur de sorte qu'il soit dans les intervalles recommandés. Avant de le mettre sous tension, laisser le détecteur se stabiliser à la température de la pièce.

Modes d’installation 1. Pour retirer le détecteur de sa base, pousser un petit tournevis dans la fente

d'accès du mécanisme de vérouillage tout en tournant le détecteur dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. Note: Le mécanisme de verrouillage peut être mis définitivement hors service en cassant et en enlevant le levier en plastique de la base.

2. Se référer à la brochure technique pour les instructions d'installation.

3. Installer et câbler la base comme expliqué dans la fiche d'installation qui l'accompagne.

4. Décoller du détecteur l'étiquette de numéro de série détachable et la recoller à l'endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros de série.

5. Relier le détecteur à la base en tournant le détecteur dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place.

6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le Série Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de sensibilité.

7. L'installation de dispositifs de protection contre l'incendie au Canada doit être conforme aux exigences de la norme CAN/ULC-S524-M91 Sur L'installation des Alarmes à Incendie, et à celles des autorités compétentes locales.

8. Avant essai initial, retirer le couvercle anti-poussières du détecteur et notifier les autorités pertinentes que des travaux d'entretien du système d'alarme d'incendie sont en cours et que ce dernier est temporairement hors service.

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387018P REV: 8.0 SIGA-HRS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector 1 / 2

SIGA-HRS Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector

Product description


(located on base)


Description: The Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector (SIGA-HRS) is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device contains rate-of-rise and fixed-temperature heat sensors to detect fire. The heat sensors monitor the temperature of the surrounding air and the detector analyzes the data from both sensors to determine whether an alarm should be initiated. The rate-of-rise heat sensor can quickly detect a fast, flaming fire. The fixed-temperature heat sensor detects fire when the air temperature near the detector exceeds the alarm point. A heat detector by itself, however, does not provide life safety protection. For life safety situations, a heat detector should be used in conjunction with ionization or photoelectric smoke detectors or a combination thereof.

LEDs: The SIGA-HRS provides two LEDs that show detector status.

• Normal: Green LED flashes • Alarm: Red LED flashes • Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously

Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns addresses to the detector. Custom addresses can be assigned to the detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.

Stand-alone operation: If isolated from the loop controller, the detector alarms when heat levels exceed preset values. See the applicable control panel manual to verify standalone capabilities.

Self-diagnostics: The SIGA-HRS contains a microprocessor capable of performing comprehensive self-diagnostic tests and storing results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile memory. These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired.

Specifications Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Normal operating current: 45 µA Alarm current: 45 µA Stand-alone alarm current: 18 mA ULI fixed-temp alarm rating: 135 °F (57 °C) ULC fixed-temp alarm rating: 140 °F (60 °C) Actual alarm point: 130 to 140 °F (54 to 60 °C) Rate-of-rise: 15 °F (8 °C)/min. Operating environment

Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C) Humidity: 0% to 93% RH, noncondensing

Compatible bases Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G

Maximum spacing: 70 ft (21.3 m) centers Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white Shipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g) Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)


frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

2. This detector will not sense fires that start in areas where heat cannot reach the detector. Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.

3. This detector is intended for use with ionization and/or photoelectric smoke detectors. The heat detector by itself does not provide life safety protection.

4. This detector will not detect oxygen levels, smoke, toxic gases, or flames. This device should only be used as part of a broad based life safety program which includes a variety of information sources pertaining to heat and smoke levels, extinguishment systems, visual and audible devices, and other safety measures.

5. Independent studies indicate that heat detectors should only be used when property protection alone is involved. Under no circumstances should heat detectors be relied on as the sole means of fire protection.


See Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for additional information and for cleaning instructions.






3. Install and wire the base as described in the Installation Sheet supplied with the base.






P/N: 387018P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet 2 / 2 SIGA-HRS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector

SIGA-HRS Détecteur de chaleur vélocimétrique et à température fixe intelligent





Description: Le détecteur intelligent à température fixe et thermovélocimétrique (SIGA-HRS) est l’un des composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent comprend un capteur thermovélocimétrique et un capteur thermique à température fixe pour la détection de la chaleur générée par un incendie. Les capteurs thermiques surveillent la température de l’air environnant et le détecteur analyse les données des deux capteurs et détermine ainsi si une alrme doit être déclenchée. Le capteur thermovélocimétrique peut rapidement détecter un incendie à flammes s’étendant rapidement. Le capteur thermique à température fixe détecte un feu lorsque la température de l’air à proximité dépasse le point d’alarme. Le détecteur de chaleur seul ne fournit pas une protection suffisante contre l’incendie lorsque des vies humaines sont en jeu. Pour assurer une telle protection, il doit être utilisé en conjonction avec des capteurs de fumée à ionisation ou photoélectrique ou combinant ces deux technologies.

Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-HRS comprend deux témoins à DEL indiquant l'état du détecteur.

• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote • Alarme: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote • Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins allumés de façon continue

Adressage électronique: Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement des adresses aux détecteurs, ou des adresses spéciales peuvent être assignées aux détecteurs via un ordinateur portatif. Aucun commutateur d'adressage n'est utilisé.

Fonctionnement autonome: En cas de panne de communication avec le contrôleur de boucle, le détecteur déclenche une alarme lorsque le niveau de chaleur dépasse un seuil pré-établi. Se référer au manuel pertinent du panneau de contrôle d'alarme d'incendie afin de vérifier les possibilités du fonctionnement autonome.

Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-HRS contient un microprocesseur capable d'effectuer une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser les résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, la dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment.

Caractéristiques techniques Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à19,95 Vcc Courant de veille: 45 µA Courant d'alarme: 45 µA Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA Seuil de température fixe ULI: 57 ºC (135 ºF) Seuil de température fixe ULC: 60 ºC (140 ºF) Point d’alarme réel: 54 à 60 ºC (130 à 140 ºF) Taux d’augmentation: 8 ºC (15 ºF)/min. Environnement de fonctionnement

Température: 0 à 38 ºC (32 à 100 ºF) Humidité: 0% à 93% HR, sans condensation


Espacement maximum: Centres de 21,3 m (70 pi) Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz) Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)



2. Ce détecteur ne peut pas détecter les incendies se déclarant dans un endroit où la chaleur ne peut pas l'atteindre. La chaleur dégagée par un feu à l'intérieur d'un mur, d'un toit ou de l'autre côté de portes fermées peut ne pas atteindre le détecteur.

3. Ce détecteur est prévu pour être utilisé avec des détecteurs de fumée à ionisation ou photoélectriques. Le détecteur thermique n’assure pas à lui seul la protection des vies humaines.

4. Ce détecteur ne détectera pas la teneur en oxygène, la fumée, les gaz toxiques ou les flammes. Il ne devrait être utilisé que comme élément d’un programme de protection plus étendu comprenant une variété de sources d’informations sur la quantité de chaleur et de fumée, des systèmes d’extinction, des dispositifs sonores et visuels ainsi que d’autres moyens de protection.

5. D’après des études indépendantes, les détecteurs thermiques ne devraient être utilisés que pour la protection des biens. On ne devrait, en aucun cas, utiliser des détecteurs thermiques comme seul moyen de protection.



7. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est PAS suffisant pour protéger le détecteur lors de travaux de construction ou de réaménagement.








6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le système série Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de sensibilité.




PRODUCT INFORMATION

INSTALLATION SHEET

DATE: 05MAY99

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387271P FILE NAME: .CDR387271P

REVISION LEVEL: 3.0


APPROVED BY: S. Jaskiel

WARNINGS

Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 VdcNormal operating current: 45 AAlarm current: 45 AStandalone alarm current: 18 mAClassification: Grade 1Operating temperature range: 32 to 100 °F (0 to 38 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH, noncondensingStorage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Maximum spacing: 70 ft (21.3 m) centersConstruction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, whiteCompatible bases

Standard: SB, SB4Relay: RB, RB4Isolator: IB, IB4, IBSAudible: AB4

Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)

SPECIFICATIONS

RELATED DOCUMENTSTechnical Bulletin (P/N 270145)

Description:

LEDs:

Electronic addressing:

Standalone operation:

Self-diagnostics:

The Intelligent Heat Detector (HRSI) is a component ofthe Signature Series. This intelligent analog device contains a Grade1 heat sensor that detects heat from fire. The heat sensor monitorsthe surrounding air temperature and the detector analyzes this data todetermine whether an alarm should be initiated.The heat sensor can quickly detect a fast, flaming fire when the airtemperature near the detector exceeds the alarm point. A heatdetector by itself, however, does NOT provide life safety protection.For life safety situations, a heat detector should be used inconjunction with ionization or photoelectric smoke detectors or both.

The HRSI provides two LEDs that indicate the status of thedetector.

Normal: Green LED flashesAlarm: Red LED flashesStandalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously

The loop controller automatically assignsaddresses to the detector. Custom addresses can be assigned to thedetectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.

In the event of communications failure withthe loop controller, the detector will alarm when heat levels exceed itspreset value. Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manualfor verification of standalone capabilities.

The HRSI contains a microprocessor capable ofperforming comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results.Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivityvalues, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatilememory. With some systems, these statistics may be retrieved andreviewed as desired.

1) Push a small screwdriver into the access slot for the tamper-resistmechanism while rotating the detector counterclockwise toremove the detector. The tamper-resist mechanism may bepermanently disabled by breaking and removing the plastic leverarm from the base.

2) Refer to the technical bulletin for installation guidelines.3) Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet

supplied with the base.4) Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and

apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number log book.5) Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector

clockwise until it snaps into the locked position.6) Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and

notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system isundergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.

Note:

1) This detector will NOT operate without electrical power. As firesfrequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discussfurther safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

2) This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where heatcannot reach the detector. Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or onthe opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.

3) This detector is intended for use with ionization and/orphotoelectric smoke detectors. The heat detector by itself doesNOT provide life safety protection.

4) This detector will NOT detect oxygen levels, smoke, toxic gases,or flames. This device should only be used as part of a broadbased life safety program which includes a variety of informationsources pertaining to heat and smoke levels, extinguishmentsystems, visual and audible devices, and other safety measures.

5) Independent studies indicate that heat detectors should only beused when property protection alone is involved. Under no

circumstances should heat detectors be relied on as the solemeans of fire protection.

6) Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned inaccordance with the requirements of the Authority HavingJurisdiction to ensure proper operation.

7) The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) MUST remain onthe detector during installation, and then be removed prior tooperation. The dust cover is NOT a substitute for removing thedetector during new construction or heavy remodeling.

8) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within therecommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to roomtemperature before applying power.

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

Tamper-Resist Lever Arm- Break off to disable -

(Located on Base)

Access Slot forTamper-Resist Mechanism

SIGA-HRSIIntelligent Grade 1 Heat Detector




TM

SPECIFICATIONS

SIGA-IB

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Operating Temperature Range

Operating Humidity Range

Storage Temperature Range

Construction & Finish


Shipping Weight

Max. Distance From Ceiling

Compatible Electrical Boxes

NOTES:

32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)

0 to 93% RH

-4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

High Impact Engineering Polymer,White

Signature Series Detectors

SIGA-IB 3.2 oz (91 g)

12 in (305 mm)(for wall mounting)

North American 1-Gang Box3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon BoxEuropean 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing CentersBESA Box

1)

2) Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided andapply the label to the inside rim of the base.

3) Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop signaling circuit fieldwires around terminals.

These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, 18AWG (2.05 sq mm, 1.5 sq mm,1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.

Term

1 Not Used

45

DATA IN (-)

Not Used

7 Not Used

2 DATA IN/OUT (+)3

Not Used

6 DATA OUT (-)

Description

Isolator Detector Base, SIGA-IB

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0


SIGA-IBDetector Base

DATE: 01/18/99




A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNALGS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION6411 Parkland DriveSarasota, FL 34243USA


7 59 3 0 1 6 0 1 9 7 4

56

34

17

2

DATA OUT (-)

DATA OUT (+)to Next Deviceor Back to LoopController


DATA IN (-)

DATA IN (+)

P/N: P-047550-1887 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 4

GENERAL WIRING PRACTICES

MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

1.1 in(27 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

BESA Box North American 1-Gang Box

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.75 in(45 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

3-1/2 in or 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box 60.3 mm Fixing Centers

For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the last device.

Control Panel

3

1.

2

Standard Detector Base

2

Relay Detector Base

Insulate Shield/Drainwith tape Shield/Drain

2

56

34

17

2

Isolator Detector Base

3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2

Shields must be continuous and insulated from ground.

Shielded wire is required ONLY in environments with very high electrical noise.

+

_

S

+

_

S

Refer tocompatible panelInstallation Sheet

for terminalassignments.




DATE: 01/18/99


FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF.: P-047550-1887


NOM DU FICHIER: P-047550-1887.CDR

CRÉÉ PAR: C. Hanrahan


Base de détecteurSIGA-IB

SIGA-IB

Gamme de températures de fonctionnement

Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement

Gamme de températures de stockage

Construction et fini



Distance maximale du plafond

Boîtes électriques compatibles

NOTES:

0 à 49 ºC (32 à 120 ºF)

0 à 93 % HR

-20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

Polymère technique avecrésistance élevée auximpacts, blanc

Détecteurs de la sérieSignature

SIGA-IB 91 g (3,2 oz)

305 mm (12 po)(montage mural)

Boîte simple standard Amérique du NordBoîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de

profondeurBoîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de

profondeurBoîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de

60,3 mmBoîte BESA

1) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75 mm(AWG nº 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.

2) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cettedernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.

3) Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les filsdu circuit de signalisation autour de bornes.

2 2 2 2

DIAGRAMMES DE CÂBLAGE CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

P/N: P-047550-1887 REV: 1.0 Page 3 of 4

Base de détecteur à isolateur SIGA-IB

56

34

17

2

Entrée desdonnées (+)

Du contrôleur de boucle Signatureou du dispositif précédent

Entrée desdonnées (-)


Sortie desdonnées (-)


1 Inutilisée2 Entrée/Sortie

des données (+)3 Entrée des

données (-)4 Inutilisée5 Inutilisée6 Sortie des

données (-)7 Inutilisée

Borne Description

P/N: P-047550-1887 REV: 1.0 Page 4 of 4

27 mm(1,1 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm(1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm(1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

45 mm(1,75 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

Boîte BESA

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) ou de 10,16 cm (4 po)de côté et de 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur

Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm,centres de fixation de 60,3 mm

CONSEILS GÉNÉRAUX DE CÂBLAGE

SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE

Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord

Un fil blindé est requis UNIQUEMENT dans les environnements à interférences électriques élevées.

Le blindage doit être continu et isolé de la terre.

aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le blindage et la terre auniveau du dernier dispositif du circuit.Câblage de classe B :

Panneau decommande

Isoler le blindage avecdu ruban adhésif

Blindage

3

1.

2

2 2

56

34

17

2

3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2

Base de détecteur standard Base de détecteur à relais Base de détecteur à isolateur

+

_

S

+

_

S

Référez-vous auxfeuilles

d'installation dupanneau

compatible pour lecâblage des

bornes.

Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)

Operating Humidity Range 0 to 93% RH

Storage Temperature Range -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)



Shipping Weight

SIGA-IB4 3.2 oz (91 g)

Max. Distance From Ceiling 12 in (305 mm)(for wall mounting)

Related Parts 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring(SIGA-TS)


North American 1-Gang Box3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon BoxEuropean 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing CentersBESA Box4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (using outer mounting

brackets on base)

NOTES:

2 2 1) These bases will accept # 12 AWG (2.05 mm ), #14 (1.5 mm ), #16 2 2 (1.0 mm ), and #18 (0.75 mm ) wire. Sizes #16 and #18 are

preferred.

2) Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided and apply the label to the inside rim of the base.

3) Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop signaling circuit field wires around terminals.

SIGA-IB4

Term

1 Not Used

45

DATA IN (-)

Not Used

7 Not Used

2 DATA IN/OUT (+)3

Not Used

6 DATA OUT (-)

Description

56

34

17

2

DATA OUT (-)

Class A Wiring Only

DATA OUT (+)to Next Deviceor Back to Loop Controller


DATA IN (-)

DATA IN (+)

Isolator Detector Base, SIGA-IB4

SPECIFICATIONSWIRING DIAGRAMS

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0


SIGA-IB4Detector Base

DATE: 01/18/99






7 39 3 0 1 6 0 1 9 7 8

P/N: P-047550-1889 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 4


MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Flush Mount)

4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Surface Mount) 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring

Flush Mount Electrical Box

1) A 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring (SIGA-TS) must be installed to give a "finished" appearance to the 4 in base.

2) Refer to Installation Sheet P/N 387056P for additional information.

NOTES:

SIGA-TS


Control Panel

3

1.

2


2

Relay Detector Base


2

56

34

17

2


3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2



+

_

S

+

_

S






Gamme de températures de fonctionnement 0 à 49 C (32 à 120 F)

Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement 0 à 93 % HR

Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 C (-4 à 140 F)

Construction et fini Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc

Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la sérieSignature


SIGA-IB4 91 g (3,2 oz)

Distance maximale du plafond 305 mm (12 po)(montage mural)

Pièces apparentées Jupe de garniture de boîteélectrique de 10,16 cm (4 po) réf. P-025031-0039


Boîte simple standard Amérique du NordBoîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeurBoîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de 60,3 mmBoîte BESABoîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeurBoîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur (utilisation de supports de montage extérieurs sur la base)

NOTES:

2 2 2 1) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75 21mm (AWG n 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.

2) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cette dernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.

3) Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils du circuit de signalisation autour de bornes.

° °

° °

°

SIGA-IB4


DATE : 01/18/99


FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : P-047550-1889 NOM DU FICHIER : P-047550-1889.CDR




Base de détecteurSIGA-IB4

DIAGRAMMES DE CÂBLAGE

Base de détecteur à isolateur SIGA-IB4

56

34

17

2

Entrée des

Du contrôleur de boucle Signature

Entrée des Sortie des

Sortie des

Borne Description1 Inutilisée2 Entrée/Sortie



données (-)

P/N: P-047550-1889 REV: 1.0 Page 3 of 4

P/N: P-047550-1889 REV: 1.0 Page 4 of 4

112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm(1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm(0,8 po)

Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur (montage en saillie)

38 mm(1,5 po)

112 mm (4,4)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm(0,8 po)

Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur (montage encastré)

Jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po)

SIGA-TS

1) Une jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po) (Réf. SIGA-TS) doit être installée pour donner un aspect final soigné à la base de 10,16 mm.

2) Se référer à la fiche d’installation réf. 387056P pour des renseignements supplémentaires.

NOTES:

Boîte électrique pour encastrement


SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE



Câblage de classe B : aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le blindage et la terre au niveau du dernier dispositif du circuit.

Panneau de commande

Isoler le blindage avec

3

1.

2

2 2

56

34

17

2

3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2


+

_

S

+

_

S

Référez-vous aux feuilles

d'installation du panneau

compatible pour le câblage des

bornes.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1788 REV: 5.0SIGA-IM - Isolator Module 1 / 2

SIGA-IMIsolator Module

Product description

The SIGA-IM Isolator Module is a component of the SignatureSeries. It is an analog addressable device used to protect aClass A data line from total collapse due to wire-to-wire shortcircuits. The SIGA-IM monitors line voltages and opens thedata line when a short is detected. A short is isolated betweenthe two SIGA-IM modules located electrically closest to theshort. The number of SIGA-IM modules on a Signature datacircuit (SDC) is limited only by the number of detectoraddresses available on that SDC.

Normal isolator operation

1. A short on the line causes all isolators to open within 23msec.

2. At 10 msec intervals, beginning on both sides nearest theloop controller, the isolators close and power the nextisolator in line.

3. An isolator next to a short closes, then reopens within 10msec.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-IMautomatically. A custom address can also be assigned to themodule via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.

Standalone isolator operation

If communication with the Signature controller fails, the SIGA-IM isolates any existing short condition and remains open untilcommunication with the Signature controller is restored and theshorted condition is removed. Refer to the applicable fire alarmcontrol panel manual to verify standalone capabilities.

Mounting

The SIGA-IM can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64mm) deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in(38 mm) deep with 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.

WarningThis module will not operate without electrical power. As firesfrequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discussfurther safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

SpecificationsOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcStandby current: 45 µAActivated current: 45 µAMaximum circuit resistance between isolators: 6 ΩOperating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Construction: High impact polymerShipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)Compatible electrical boxes

North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang boxStandard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box with2-gang cover

Application informationIn a Class A circuit, a short will be isolated between the twoSIGA-IM modules located electrically closest to the short asshown in the two configurations below.

This part is effectively removed from the circuit

IM IM

Short circuit

Data outLoop controller

Data return

CLASS A CONFIGURATION

This part is effectively removed from the circuit

IM IM

Short circuit

Data outLoop controller

Data return

CLASS A CONFIGURATIONWITH T-TAPS

Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-IM is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.

P/N: P-047550-1788 REV: 5.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 2 SIGA-IM - Isolator Module







Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA70 National ElectricalCode.


1/4 in (~6 mm)



Wiring diagram

[4]

4 3 2 1

Not used Green LED(normal)

From UL/ULC listed control panel or previous device

To next device or return terminals on listed control panel

DATA IN DATA OUT(+)(–)

(+)(–)

[3] [5]

Notes

1. For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appropriatemanufacturer's documentation

2. Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire

[3] Refer to Signature Loop Controller installation sheet forwiring specifications

[4] This module should be used only with Class A wiring

[5] Maximum circuit resistance between isolators is 6 Ω


Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387346 REV: 3.0SIGA-IO - Input/Output Module 1 / 3

SIGA-IOInput/Output Module

Product description

1234

5678

The SIGA-IO Input/Output Module is an intelligent analog-addressable component of the Signature Series. The SIGA-IOrequires one module address and provides the followingmodes of operation:

• Output with monitor input (personality codes 31 and 32)

• Input/programmable output (personality codes 33through 40)

Personality codes downloaded to the SIGA-IO during systemconfiguration determine its function. The Signature loopcontroller automatically assigns an address to SIGA-IO, but itwill accept custom address assignments from a laptopcomputer.



Mounting



The SIGA-IO requires the Signature loop controller. The loopcontroller downloads the personality code which determineshow the module operates. The following personality codes canbe downloaded to the SIGA-IO.

Personality code 31 (factory default): N.O. relay output withmonitor input: Personality code 31 configures the SIGA-IO as anormally open output relay contact that requires a maintaineddry contact input activation. The activation must take placewithin a time period defined by the user (15 second default, 5to 120 second selectable) after the output circuit activation. Ifthe fire alarm control panel does not receive a monitor inputwithin the specified time, it will generate a trouble condition.

Personality code 32: N.C. relay output with monitor input:Personality code 32 operates the same as personality code 31,except that the output is configured as a normally closed, drycontact relay.

Personality code 33: N.O. relay output with alarm latchinginput (Class B): Personality code 33 configures the SIGA-IO asa normally open, dry contact relay and an alarm latching inputfor Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact ofthe initiating device changes state, the SIGA-IO sends analarm signal to the Signature loop controller and the alarmcondition is latched at the module. The output must beprogrammed to be activated by the panel.

Personality code 34: N.C. relay output with alarm latchinginput (Class B): Personality code 34 operates the same aspersonality code 33, except that the output is configured as anormally closed, dry contact relay.

Personality code 35: N.O. relay output with delayed alarmlatching input (Class B): Personality code 35 configures theSIGA-IO as a normally open, dry contact relay and an alarmlatching input for Class B contact initiating devices. Thispersonality requires that a change in the state of the initiatingdevice be maintained for approximately 16 seconds before theSIGA-IO sends an alarm signal to the Signature loop controller.The alarm condition is latched at the module, and the outputmust be programmed to be activated by the panel. Personalitycode 35 is only for use with non-retarded, normally openwaterflow alarm switches.

Personality code 36: N.C. relay output with delayed alarmlatching input (Class B): Personality code 36 operates thesame as personality code 35, except that the output isconfigured as a normally closed, dry contact relay. Personalitycode 36 is only for use with non-retarded, normally closedwaterflow alarm switches.

Personality code 37: N.O. relay output with active non-latching input (Class B): Personality code 37 configures theSIGA-IO as a normally open, dry contact relay and an activelatching input for Class B contact initiating devices. When theinput contact of the initiating device changes state, the SIGA-IO sends an active signal to the Signature loop controller. Theactive signal does not latch, and restores when the inputdevice returns to its normal state. The output must beprogrammed to be activated by the panel. Personality code 37is typically used for monitoring normally open fans, dampers,doors, etc.

Personality codes 38: N.C. relay output with active non-latching input (Class B): Personality code 38 operates thesame as personality code 37, except that the output isconfigured as a normally closed, dry contact relay. Personalitycode 38 is typically used for monitoring normally closed fans,dampers, doors, etc.

Personality code 39: N.O. relay output with active latchinginput (Class B): Personality code 39 configures the SIGA-IO asa normally open, dry contact relay and an active latching inputfor Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact ofthe initiating device changes state, the SIGA-IO sends anactive signal to the Signature loop controller and the activecondition is latched at the module. The output must beprogrammed to be activated by the panel.

P/N: 387346 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 3 SIGA-IO - Input/Output Module

Personality code 40: N.C. relay output with active latchinginput (Class B): Personality code 40 operates the same aspersonality code 39, except that the output is configured as anormally closed, dry contact relay.


components. Failure to do so may result in serious injuryor loss of life. Dangerous voltages may be present at theterminals even when power is shut off.



SpecificationsOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcStandby current: 250 µAActivated current: 430 µAContact ratings (pilot duty)

24 Vdc @ 2A120 Vac @ 0.5 A

Relay type: Form A or BOperating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Construction: High impact engineering polymerShipping weight: 0.34 lb (0.15 kg)Compatible electrical boxes



Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-IO is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.







Notes



3. Route power-limited wiring and nonpower-limited wiringthrough separate conduit holes. Maintain 1/4-inch (6.4mm) separation between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring



1/4 in (~6 mm)





Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387346 REV: 3.0SIGA-IO - Input/Output Module 3 / 3

Wiring diagram

Data in (+)

TB1

TB2

Data in (-)From Signature loop controller

or previous device

Data out (-)

Data out (+)To next device

N.O. or N.C.

[1][2][3]

[4]

[5]UL/ULCListed47 kEOL

Ω

[6][7]

[6]

[2]

N.O. or N.C.

[8]

[2]

1234

5678


Green LED(normal)

Notes

[1] 25 Ω max per wire

[2] 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) max; 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) min

[3] 10 Vdc @ 350 µA, max

[4] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet forwiring specifications.

[5] Personality code determines whether this output will beN.C. or N.O.

[6] Power-limited and supervised


• Maintain a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) space from power-limited wiring.

or

• Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable inaccordance with NFPA 70 National Electric Code.

[8] The Nomex isolation barrier separates power-limited andnonpower-limited wiring. Watch out for the sharp cornersduring installation and maintenance.

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387016P REV: 8.0 SIGA-IPHS(B) - Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector 1 / 2

SIGA-IPHS(B) Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector

Product description


(located on base)


Description: The Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector, model SIGA-IPHS(B), is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device contains ionization and photoelectric smoke sensors and provides an additional heat-sensing element for detecting fire. The detector analyzes the data from all three sensors and determines whether an alarm should be initiated.

The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity and notifies the loop controller of its condition. It issues a dirty-sensor warning when it reaches a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for service while the detector still operates within UL/ULC limits.

LEDs: The detector has two LEDs that show status.

• Normal: Green LED flashes • Alarm/active: Red LED flashes • Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously

Electronic Addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to the detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.

Stand-Alone Operation: If isolated from the loop controller, the detector alarms when smoke levels exceed a preset value. See the applicable control panel manual to verify standalone capability.

Self-Diagnostics: The detector contains a microprocessor capable of performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile memory. These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired.

Specifications Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Normal operating current: 45 µA Alarm current: 45 µA Standalone alarm current: 18 mA Alarm point temperature: 60 to 70 °F (33 to 38 °C) above ambient Ionization source: Americium 241, 0.14 µCi Air velocity: 0 - 500 ft/min (0 to 2.54 m/s) ULI/ULC smoke sensitivity range: 0.67% to 3.70% obsc/ft (305 mm) Environmental compensation: Automatic Operating environment

Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C) Humidity: 0% to 93% RH, noncondensing Installation altitude: 6,000 ft (1,828 m) maximum

Compatible bases Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Maximum distance from ceiling (wall-mounted): 12 in (305 mm) Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g) Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)


frequently cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

2. This detector will not sense fires in areas where smoke cannot reach it. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.

3. Ionization detectors are best suited for detecting fast, flaming fires. Photoelectric detectors are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. The heat sensor in this device provides a source of supplemental information to that provided by the other sensors. The heat sensor by itself does not provide life safety protection.

4. Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC Standard CAN 536.



7. Under normal conditions this unit does not require calibration. If calibration is required, call Customer Service at 1-800-655-4497 to arrange for return to the factory.


8. Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490 Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.




3. Install and wire the base as described in the Installation Sheet supplied with the base.






Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387016P REV: 8.0 SIGA-IPHS(B) - Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector 2 / 2

SIGA-IPHS(B) Détecteur 4D multicapteurs intelligent





Description: Le détecteur de fumée 4D multicapteurs intelligent, modèle SIGA-IPHS(B), est l'un des composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent comprend à la fois des capteurs de fumée photoélectrique et à ionisation et un capteur thermique pour la détection des incendies. Le détecteur analyse les données des trois capteurs et détermine ainsi si une alarme doit être déclenchée.

Le détecteur contrôle constamment toute modification de sensibilité due à l'environnement et informe le contrôleur de boucle de la situation. Une alarme de capteur sale est émise par le détecteur lorsque l'encrassement du capteur a atteint une certaine limite. Ceci informe l'opérateur du système de la nécessité d'un nettoyage alors que le détecteur est encore capable de fonctionner dans les limites UL/ULC.

Témoins à DEL: Le détecteur comprennent deux témoins à DEL.

• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote • Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote • Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins allumés de façon continue

Adressage électronique: Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement des adresses aux détecteurs ou des adresses spéciales peuvent être assignées aux détecteurs via un ordinateur portatif. Aucun commutateur d'adressage n'est utilisé.

Fonctionnement autonome: En cas de panne de communication avec le contrôleur de boucle, le détecteur déclenche une alarme lorsque le niveau de fumée dépasse un seuil pré-établi. Se référer au manuel pertinent du panneau de contrôle d'alarme d'incendie afin de vérifier les possibilités du fonctionnement autonome.

Auto-diagnostics: Le détecteur contient un microprocesseur capable d'effectuer une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser les résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, la dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment.

Caractéristiques techniques Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc Courant de veille: 45 µA Courant d'alarme: 45 µA Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA Température - point d’alarme: 33 à 38 ºC (60 à 70 ºF) audessus de la temp.

ambiante Source d’ionisation: Américium 241, 0,14 µCi Vitesse de l’air: 0 à 2,54 m/s (0 à 500 pi/min) Seuil de sensibilité à la fumée ULI/ULC: 0,67% à 3,70 % obsc/pi (305 mm) Compensation/environnement: Automatique Environnement de fonctionnement:

Température: 0 à 38 ºC (32 à 100 ºF) Humidité: 0% à 93% HR, sans condensation Altitude d'installation: 1.828 m (6.000 pi) maximum


Distance max. du plafond (montage mural): 305 mm (12 po) Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz) Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)



2. Ce détecteur ne peut pas détecter les incendies se déclarant dans un endroit où la fumée ne peut pas l'atteindre. La fumée dégagée par un feu à l'intérieur d'un mur, d'un toit ou de l'autre côté de portes fermées peut ne pas atteindre le détecteur.

3. Les détecteurs à ionisation peuvent détecter de nombreux types de feux et offrent une excellente détection des feux à développement rapide avec flammes. Les détecteurs photoélectriques peuvent dé-tecter de nombreux types de feux et offrent une excellente détection des feux couvants à développement lent. Le capteur thermique de ce dispositif est prévu pour fournir des renseignements supplémen-taires à ceux du capteur de fumée photoélectrique. Le capteur thermique tout seul n’assure pas la protection de vies humaines.

4. Un entretien (régulier ou particulier) est nécessaire pour assurer le bon fonctionnement du système. Cet entretien doit être planifié con-formément aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Se référer aux normes NFPA 72 et CAN/ULC 536.

5. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est PAS suffisant pour protéger le détecteur lors de travaux de construction ou de réamé-nagement.


7. Dans les conditions normales ce dispositif ne nécessite pas d'étalonnage. Si un étalonnage est nécessaire, appelez Service à Clients au 1-800-655-4497 pour dispositions de renvoi à l’usine.


8. Effectuer un essai du détecteur au moyen du dispositif d'essai de détecteur de fumée et de l'accessoire adaptateur/tube, modèle 1490, fabriqué par Home Safeguard Inc.










PRODUCT INFORMATION

INSTALLATION SHEET

DATE: 28APR99

SHEET P/N: P-047550-1898 FILE NAME: P-047550-1898.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0


APPROVED BY: R. Right

WARNINGS



SPECIFICATIONS

PRODUCT DIAGRAM


(Located on Base)


SIGA-IPHSIIntelligent 4D Multisensor

Smoke Detector

Description: The Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector (model IPHSI) is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device contains ionization and photoelectric smoke sensors and provides an additional heat sensing element for detecting fire. The detector analyzes the data from all three sensors and determines whether an alarm should be initiated.

The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity and notifies the loop controller of its condition. It issues a dirty-sensor warning when it reaches a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for service while the detector still operates.

LEDs: The IPHSI has two LEDs that show status.

Normal: Green LED flashesAlarm/active: Red LED flashesStandalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously



Self-Diagnostics: The detector contains a microprocessor capable of performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile memory. These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired.

1) Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot and rotate the detector counterclockwise to remove it. Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.

2) See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.

3) Install and wire the base as described in the Installation Sheet supplied with the base.

4) Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number log book.

5) Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise until it snaps into the locked position.

6) Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.

1) This detector will NOT operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

2) This detector will NOT sense fires in areas where smoke cannot reach it. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.

3) Ionization detectors are best suited for detecting fast, flaming fires. Photoelectric detectors are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. The heat sensor in this device provides a source of supplemental information to that provided by the other sensors. The heat sensor by itself does NOT provide life safety protection.

4) Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction to ensure proper operation.

5) The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) MUST remain on the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to operation. The dust cover is NOT a substitute for removing the detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.

6) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the

recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room temperature before applying power.

7) Under normal conditions, this unit does not require calibration. However, if calibration is required, return to:

GS Building Systems Corporation5 North Main StreetPittsfield, ME 04967-1500

See the Technical Bulletin for cleaning instructions.

8) Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490 Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.

Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 VdcNormal operating current: 45 µAAlarm current: 45 µAStandalone alarm current: 18 mAAlarm point temperature range: 60 - 70 °F (33 - 38 °C) above ambientIonization source: Americium 241, 0.135 µCiAir velocity range: 0 - 500 ft/min (0 - 2.54 m/s)Operating temperature range: 32 - 100 °F (0 - 38 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 - 93 % RH, non-condensingStorage temperature range: -4 - 140 °F (-20 - 60 °C)Environmental compensation: AutomaticConstruction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, whiteCompatible bases


Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)Maximum distance from ceiling (wall-mounted): 12 in (305 mm)Maximum installation altitude: 6,000 ft. (1,828 m)




TM

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387013P REV: 8.0 SIGA-IS - Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector 1 / 2

SIGA-IS Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector

Product description


(located on base)


Description: The Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector (SIGA-IS) is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device senses changes in air samples, analyzes the information, and then determines whether an alarm should be initiated. The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity due to the environment (e.g. dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity) and notifies the loop controller of its condition. The SIGA-IS issues a dirty-sensor warning when it reaches its preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for service while the detector is still operating within UL/ULC limits. LEDs: The SIGA-IS detector has two status LEDs: • Normal: Green LED flashes • Alarm/active: Red LED flashes • Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to the detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. Standalone operation: If unable to communicate with the loop controller, the detector alarms when smoke levels exceed its preset value. Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manual for verification of standalone capabilities. Self-diagnostics: The SIGA-IS contains a microprocessor capable of performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired.

Specifications Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Normal operating current: 45 µA Alarm current: 45 µA Standalone alarm current: 18 mA Ionization source: Americium 241, 1 µCi Air velocity: 0 to 75 ft/min (0 to 22.8 m/min). See warning 5, below. ULI/ULC smoke sensitivity: 0.61% to 1.34% obsc/ft (305 mm) Operating environment

Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C) Humidity: 0% to 93% RH, noncondensing Installation altitude: 6,000 ft (1,828 m) maximum

Environmental compensation: Automatic Compatible bases Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Maximum distance from ceiling (wall-mounted): 12 in (305 mm) Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white Shipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g) Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)


frequently cause power interruption, you should discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

2. This detector will not sense fires in areas where smoke cannot reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.

3. Ionization detectors have a wide range of fire-sensing capabilities and are best suited for detecting fast, flaming fires.


5. Install the detector away from air supplies and air diffusers. The average air velocity should not exceed 75 ft/min (22.8 m/min). Brief gusts up to 300 ft./min (91.4 m/min.) are allowed.




Refer to Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for additional information and cleaning instructions.


Installation instructions 1. Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot while

rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the detector. Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.

2. See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines. 3. Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet

supplied with the base. 4. Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and

apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook. 5. Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise

until it snaps into the locked position. 6. NFPA code requires that a calibrated sensitivity test be performed

upon completion of the original installation and following any modifications or additions to the system. The Signature Series can perform this test and generate a system sensitivity report.



P/N: 387013P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet 2 / 2 SIGA-IS - Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector

SIGA-IS Détecteur de Fumée à Ionisation Intelligent





Description: Le détecteur de fumée à ionisation intelligent modèle SIGA-IS est l'un des composants du série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent détecte les changements dans la composition de l'air environnant, analyse ces informations et détermine ainsi si une alarme doit être déclenchée.

Le détecteur contrôle constamment toute modification de sensibilité due à l'environnement (en raison de poussières, de fumées, de changements de température ou d'humidité) et informe le contrôleur de boucle de la situation. Une alarme de capteur sale est émise par le détecteur lorsque l'encrassement du capteur a atteint une certaine limite. Ceci informe l'opérateur du système de la nécessité d'un nettoyage alors que le détecteur est encore capable de fonctionner dans les limites UL/ULC.

Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-IS comprend deux témoins à DEL indiquant l'état du détecteur:

• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote • Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote • Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins rouge et vertsont allumés de façon

continue



Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-IS contient un microprocesseur capable d'effectuer une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser les résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, la dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment.

Caractéristiques techniques Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 volts cc Courant de veille: 45 µA Courant d'alarme: 45 µA Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA Source d'ionisation: Américium 241, 1µCi Vitesse de l'air: 0 à 22.8 m/min (0 à 75 ft/min). Voyez avertissement 5, ci-

dessous. Seuil de sensibilité à la fumée ULI/ULC: 0,61% à 1,34% obsc/pi (305 mm) Environnement de fonctionnement

Température: 0 à 49 ºC (32 à 120 ºF) Humidité: 0% à 93% HR, sans condensation Altitude d'installation: 1,828 m (6,000 pi) maximum

Compensation/environnement: Automatique Bases compatibles Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Distance max. du plafond (montage mural): 305 mm (12 po) Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée auximpacts blanc Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz)

Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF) Avertissements 1. Ce dispositif NE fonctionne pas en l'absence de courant électrique. Les



3. Les détecteurs à ionisation peuvent détecter de nombreux types de feux et offrent une excellente détection des feux à développement rapide avec flammes.


5. Il est recommandé d'installer le détecteur loin des arrivées et des diffuseurs d'air. La vitesse moyenne de l'air ne doit pas dépasser 22,8 m/min (75 pi/min). Des rafales d'air de 91,5 m/min (300 pi/min) maximum sont acceptables pendant de courtes périodes.

6. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle antipoussière orange vif qui doit être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est pas suffisant pour protéger le détecteur lors de travaux de construction ou de réaménagement.






d'accès du vérouillage tout en tournant le détecteur dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. NOTE: Le mécanisme de verrouillage peut être mis définitivement hors service en cassant et en enlevant le levier en plastique de la base.







8. Avant essai initial, retirer le couvercle antipoussières du détecteur et notifier les autorités pertinentes que des travaux d'entretien du système d'alarme d'incendie sont en cours et que ce dernier est temporairement hors service.

DATE: 28APR99

INSTALLATION SHEET

SHEET P/N: P-047550-1880

REVISION LEVEL: 2.0

FILE: P-047550-1880.CDR



PRODUCT INFORMATION

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

SPECIFICATIONS

Description: The Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector (ISI) is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device senses changes in air samples from its surroundings, analyzes the information, and then determines if an alarm should be initiated.

The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity due to the environment (e.g., dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity) and notifies the loop controller of its condition. The ISI issues a dirty sensor warning when it reaches a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for service while the detector is still able to operate.

LEDs: The ISI has two LEDs that indicate the status of the detector.

Normal: Green LED flashesAlarm / active: Red LED flashesStandalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously


Standalone operation: In the event of communications failure with the loop controller, the detector will alarm when smoke levels exceed its preset value. Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manual for verification of standalone capabilities.

Self-diagnostics: The ISI contains a microprocessor capable of performing a comprehensive range of self-diagnostic measurements and storing the results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of recorded alarms and troubles are stored in non-volatile memory. These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired.


1) Push a small screwdriver into the access slot for the tamper-resist mechanism while rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the detector. Note: The tamper-resist mechanism may be permanently disabled by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.

2) Refer to the appropriate technical bulletin for installation guidelines.

3) Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet supplied with the base.




WARNINGS


2) This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where smoke cannot reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.

3) Ionization detectors have a wide range of fire-sensing capabilities and are best suited for detecting fast, flaming fires.


5) It is recommended that the detector be installed away from air supplies and air diffusers. The average air velocity should NOT exceed 75 ft/min (22.8 m/min). Gusts of up to 300 ft/min (91.4 m/min) are allowed for short periods of time.


7) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room temperature before applying power.



Refer to the technical bulletin for additional information and cleaning instructions.


Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 VdcNormal operating current: 45 µAAlarm current: 45 µAStandalone alarm current: 18 mAAir velocity range: see Warnings Note 5Ionization source: Americium 241, 1 µCiOperating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH, non-condensingStorage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Environmental compensation: AutomaticConstruction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, whiteCompatible bases


Shipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g)Maximum distance from ceiling(for wall-mounted position): 12 in (305 mm)Maximum installation altitude: 6,000 ft. (1,828 m)

Tamper-resist lever arm: break off to disable

(located on base)



SIGA-ISIIntelligent Ionization Smoke Detector




TM

Installation Sheet 21AUG01 P/N: 387025P REV: 6.0SIGA-LED - Remote LED Alarm Indicator 1 / 2


SIGA-LEDRemote LED Alarm Indicator

Product description

Description

The Remote LED Alarm Indicator (LED) is a component of theSignature Series. This polarized device provides visualindication when a detector initiates an alarm. A clear lens, lightemitting diode pulses on and off in case of an alarm condition.

The LED can ONLY be used with the Standard Detector Base,Model SB or SB4. It is NOT compatible with any other bases.

SpecificationsLED type: Clear lens, red light emitting diode

Luminous intensity: 65 mcd

Operation: Pulses on alarm condition

Resistance per wire: 10 max.

Operating powerVoltage: 3 VdcCurrent: 2 mA

Operating environmentTemperature: 32 - 120 °F (0 - 49 °C)Humidity: 0 - 93% RH

Storage temperature range: -4 - 140 °F (-20 - 60 °C)

Compatible detectors: Signature Series detectors

Compatible bases: Standard bases: SB, SB4

Duct applications: Duct detector mounting plate, DH

Compatible electrical boxes: North American 1-gang box,standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover

Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer,white

Shipping weight: 3.2 oz (90 g)

Comments: Not for use with 24 Vdc circuits.

Installation instructions1. Refer to Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145) for installation

guidelines.

2. Wire the LED to the base as described in the InstallationSheet supplied with the base. Be sure to observe thepolarity of the terminals on the terminal block as shown inthe diagram below.

Wiring diagram

(To Terminal #5)(To Terminal #4)

CompatibleDetector Base

Warnings1. This remote annunciator is NOT intended to be used as an

evacuation signal for Life Safety situations.

2. This remote annunciator will NOT operate if the devicethat it is connected to it is not powered.

3. The LED used in this device has a 180° range of visibility,but the best visibility is achieved in direct viewingapplications. This device should NOT be installed in areasof direct sunlight, or where its intensity may be reduced.

P/N: 387025P REV: 6.0 21AUG01 Installation Sheet2 / 2 SIGA-LED - Remote LED Alarm Indicator


SIGA-LEDDEL d’alarme à distance


Description

La DEL d’alarme à distance (LED) est un composant duSérie Signature. Ce dispositif polarisé fournit une indicationvisuelle du déclenchement d’une alarme par un détecteur.Une diode électroluminescente à diffuseur transparentclignote en cas d' alarme.

Le LED est utilisable avec une base de détecteur standardUNIQUEMENT, modèle SB ou SB4. Il N’est PAS compatibleavec les autres bases.

CaractéristiquesType de DEL: Diffuseur transparent, diode

électroluminescente rouge

Intensité lumineuse: 65 mcd

Fonctionnement: Clignote en cas d’alarme

Résistance par fil: 10 Max.

Puissance de fonctionnementTension: 3 VdcCourant: 2 mA

Enviroment de fonctionnementLa température: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)Humidité: 0 - 93 % HR

Gamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140°F)

Détecteurs compatibles: Détecteurs de la Série Signature

Bases compatibles: Bases standard: SB, SB4

Applications sur conduits: Plaque de montage de détecteurpour conduits, DH

Boîtes électriques compatibles: Boîte Amérique du Nordsimple standard. Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur aveccouvercle simple.

Construction et fini: Polymère technique avec résistanceélevée aux impacts, blanc

Poids à la livraison: 90 g (3,2 oz)

Commentaires :Ne Pas utiliser avec les circuits de 24 Vcc.

Mode d’installation1. Se référer à la brochure technique (P/N 270145) pour

des instructions d’installation.

2. Câbler le LED à la base selon les explications de lafiche d’installation fournie avec cette dernière.Respecter la polarité des bornes du bornier, commeindiqué dans le diagramme ci-dessous.

Diagramme de câblage

( )°Vers la borne n 5

( )°Vers la borne n 4

Base de détecteurcompatible

Avertissements1. Ce téléannonciateur N’est PAS conçu pour être utilisé

comme signal d’évacuation dans des situations dedanger mortel.

2. Ce téléannonciateur NE fonctionne PAS si le dispositifauquel il est connecté n’est pas sous tension.

3. La DEL utilisée dans ce dispositif a une visibilité de180°, mais une visibilité optimale n’est obtenue quedans des situations de visualisation directe. Ce dispositifNE doit PAS être exposé directement au soleil ni installéà un emplacement où l intensité de sa lumière naturellepourrait être réduite.

PRODUCT INFORMATION

SIGA-MAB

SPECIFICATIONS

DATE: 08/17/98

INSTALLATION SHEET:

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387356P FILE NAME: 387356P.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0





SIGA-MABClass A/B Input/Output Module

Operating Voltage Range 15.2 to 19.95 VDC

Output Ratings24 VDC 2A25 V Audio 50 W70 V Audio 35 W

Operating Temperature 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)


Storage Temperature -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Construction High impact engineering polymer

Shipping Weight 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)

Mounting SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard

UL Compatibility ID 0.0

Current Ratings

Class B IDCPersonality Code(s) 1, 2, 3, or 4Standby Current 250 µAActivated Current 400 µAEOL Resistor 47 KΩ

Class A IDCPersonality Code(s) 9, 10, 11, or 12Standby Current 223 µAActivated Current 365 µAEOL Resistor N/A

Class A or B NACPersonality Code(s) 15 or 16Standby Current 223 µAActivated Current 365 µAEOL Resistor 47 KΩ for Class B

No EOL for Class A

CA

T N

O.

JP2JP1

SIG

A-M

AB

4733

8735

6E

DW

AR

DS

SY

ST

EM

S T

EC

HN

OLO

GY

ALL CIRCUITS POWER LIMITED

387356P

9810

Description

The SIGA-MAB Class A/B Input/Output Module, is an addressable Signature Series component, that may be used in any of the following configurations:

Class A or B dry contact initiating device circuit (IDC)Class A or B notification appliance circuit (NAC)

Note: See Programming, on the next page, for personality code definitions.

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of module status. A flashing green LED indicates normal status. A flashing red LED indicates the alarm/active state.

The SIGA-MAB plugs into any available module space on a SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard, and captive screws secure it to the board. All wiring connections are made to terminals on the motherboard.

The personality code determines the function performed by the SIGA-MAB. The Signature controller automatically assigns two addresses and downloads personality codes to the SIGA-MAB during system configuration. A custom address can be assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No addressing switches are used.




PROGRAMMING

Personality Code 1: N/O Alarm Latching (Class B)Personality code 1 configures the SIGA-MAB for Class B normally-open dry contact initiating devices (for example: pull-stations and heat detectors). When the N/O input contact of an initiating device closes, an alarm signal is sent to the Signature controller and the alarm condition is latched at the module. This is the default personality code assigned by the factory.

Personality Code 2: N/O Alarm Delayed Latching (Class B)Personality code 2 operates like personality code 1, but the contact must remain closed for approximately 16 seconds before an alarm status is generated. Personality code 2 is only used with non-retarded waterflow alarm switches.

Personality Code 3: N/O Active Non-latching (Class B)

Personality Code 4: N/O Active Latching (Class B)

Personality code 3 typically monitors equipment like fans, dampers, and doors. A contact closure causes an active status, which does not latch at the module, instead of an alarm status.

Personality code 4 typically monitors supervisory and tamper switches. A contact closure causes an active status, which latches at the module, instead of an alarm status.

Personality Code 9: N/O Alarm Latching (Class A)Personality code 9 configures the SIGA-MAB for the connection of Class A normally-open dry contact initiating devices (for example: pull stations and heat detectors). When the N/O input contact of an initiating device closes, an alarm signal is sent to the Signature controller and the alarm condition is latched at the module.

Personality Code 10: N/O Alarm Delayed Latching (Class A)Personality code 10 operates the same as personality code 9, but the contact must remain closed for approximately 16 seconds before an alarm status is generated. Personality code 10 typically monitors waterflow alarm switches.

Personality Code 11: N/O Active - Non-latching (Class A)Personality code 11 operates like personality code 9, but the contact closure causes an active status, which does not latch at the module, instead of an alarm status. Personality code 11 typically monitors equipment like fans, dampers, and doors.

Personality Code 12: N/O Active - Latching (Class A)Personality code 12 operates the same as personality code 9, but the contact closure causes an active status, which latches at the module, instead of an alarm status. Personality code 12 typically monitors supervisory and tamper switches.

Personality Code 15: Signal Output (Class A)Personality code 15 configures the SIGA-MAB for the connection of a Class A NAC output (for example: bells, speakers, and strobes).

Personality Code 16: Signal Output (Class B)Personality code 16 configures the SIGA-MAB for the connection of a Class B NAC output (for example: bells, speakers, and strobes).

Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-UM. Make sure the personality code for channel 2 remains 00.

?

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS

387356P.CDR Page 2 of 4

1 Disconnect power to the cabinets before removing or installing components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life.

2 The SIGA-MAB will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

3 The personality code for the SIGA-MAB is factory set to 0.

Warnings

! Caution!



The SIGA-MAB is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit. It contains no user-servicable parts and should not be disassembled.

1 Install the SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard according to its installation sheet.

2 Verify that the Signature Data Circuit (SDC) is properly connected to TB7.

3 Plug the SIGA-MAB into any available position on the motherboard.

4 Secure the module to the motherboard with both of its captive screws.

5 Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring instructions of this installation sheet (following pages).

6 Write the module's address on the label provided and apply the label to the module.

7 Peel off the removable bar-coded serial number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate location in the Serial Number Logbook.

Note: All wiring should conform to NFPA 70-1996, National Electrical Code Article 760, Section 760-54(a)(1), Exception No. 2 and 3. Refer to UIO series motherboard installation sheets for wire routing information.

4321

4321

TB14

TB15

SIGA-MAB

Personality Codes: 1, 2, 3, or 4

Personality Codes: 9, 10, 11, or 12

No connections required for SIGA-MAB using personality codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, or 12.

No connections required for SIGA-MAB using personality codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, or 12.

1 2 3 4

5

6 Remove motherboard jumpers.

SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard

CA

T N

O.

JP2JP1

SIG

A-M

AB

47

33

87

35

6E

DW

AR

DS

SY

ST

EM

S T

EC

HN

OL

OG

Y

Dry Contact Input Wiring (Personality Codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, or 12)

1 2 4

1 2 3 4

3

1

2

8

4

5

6

7

Maximum 25Ω resistance per wire. Maximum circuit capacitance of 0.1 µF.

2Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75

2mm )

Refer to Signature controller Installation Sheet for wiring specifications.

Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350µA

The SIGA-UIO6R does not come with TB14.

The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13.

Maximum alarm current is 17 mA. Operating voltage range is 16.0 to 24.0 Vdc. All wiring is supervised and power-limited.

NotesUL/ULCListed47KΩEOL

1 2 4

TB7

Green LED (Normal)

Red LED (Active)

Data Out


Data In

RemoveModule

Jumpers

3

4321


+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

Riser 1 Out

Riser 1 Out

4321

TB14

TB15

No connections required for SIGA-MAB using personality codes 15 or 16.

1 2

Riser 1 In

Riser 1 In

Single Input Wiring (Personality Code 15 or 16)

UL/ULCListed47KΩEOL

Typical Notification Appliance Circuit

Typical Speaker Circuit

The SIGA-MAB requires transient protection for installations that connect electromechanical bells or horns to output circuits. The module's circuitry requires a bi-polar transient protector (P/N 235196P) for protection against transient spikes caused by the inductive load of bells or horns.

Connect the bi-polar transient protector assembly across the terminals of the bell or horn electrically closest to the module. The bi-polar transient protector is not polarity-sensitive.

Locate bells and horns at least 6ft. (1.83 m) from the module.

Bi-polar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)

Transient Protection Caution

4321

1 2 3 4

PersonalityCode 15

PersonalityCode 16

!

3

1

2

4

5

6

7

6

8

9

4 97 8

7

975

For maximum resistance, see the appropriate technical reference manual. Maximum circuit capacitance is 0.1 µF.

2 2Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm )

Refer to Signature Controller Installation Sheet for wiring specifications.

The SIGA-UIO6R does not come with TB14.


Supervised and power limited.

Supervised and power limited when connected to a power limited source. If the source is non-power limited, power limited marking shall be eliminated.

The input for this riser is common to all modules.

Use UL/ULC Regulated Power Supply listed for Fire Protective Signaling.

Notes


SIGA-MAB

CA

T N

O.

JP2JP1

SIG

A-M

AB

47

33

87

35

6E

DW

AR

DS

SY

ST

EM

S T

EC

HN

OL

OG

Y


1 2 3 4

SIGA-UIOR series motherboard individual Riser 1 connection. Install the jumpers between adjacentmodules that use the same riser.

TB7

Green LED (Normal)

Red LED (Active)

Data Out


Data In

RemoveModule

Jumpers

3

4321

Product Information

Installation Instructions

WARNINGS

Specifications

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGYSARASOTA , FL 800-655-4497 Fax. 941-753-1806CHESHIRE, CT 203-699-3000 Fax. 203-699-3075OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax. 519-376-7258INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-678-6767 Fax. 905-678-9791

SIGA-MB4TRANSPONDER MOUNTING BRACKET

PART NO.: P-047550-1775 ISSUE: 1

SIGA Series Module

Table A - Compatible Modules

Installation Instruction Part No.

SIGA-CT1 387021P

387023P

387037P

387057P

387058P

SIGA-CR

SIGA-CT2

SIGA-MM1

SIGA-WTM

DESCRIPTIONThe Transponder Mounting Bracket, Model SIGA-MB4, is a component of the Signature Series System. This bracket allows for mounting two 1-gang compatible modules in a European 100 mm Square Box or Standard North American 4" Square Box.

Ensure that the self-adhesive bar code label on the module is not lost or damaged when removing the 1-gang module from the 1-gang mounting bracket and installing it in the 2-gang mounting bracket. Without the bar code label, you will be unable to address the module.

The following items must be retained from the 1-gang module(s) that are to be mounted in the SIGA-MB4:

• Self-adhesive address labels

• End-of-line resistors, if supplied

• Bilingual faceplate labels

• Peel-off bar code labels

1) Install compatible electrical box.

2) Remove the desired module(s) from the 1-gang bracket and snap into the SIGA-MB4 2-gang mounting bracket. Ensure that the self-adhesive bar code label is NOT lost or damaged.

NOTES: Use the faceplate and faceplate screws provided with the SIGA-MB4 instead of those provided with the modules.

When mounting two 1-gang modules in the SIGA-MB4, the tabs on top and bottom should be straightened flush with the top and bottom of the bracket. This allows the modules to be placed inside the bracket (See Figure).

3) Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground faults. Wire and install the module(s) in accordance with the appropriate instruction as listed in Table A.

4) Using the two 6-32 x 7/16" (11 mm) screws, mount the SIGA-MB4 to the electrical box.

5) Use the faceplate and four 4-24 x 5/16" (8 mm) self-tapping screws provided with the SIGA-MB4 and mount the faceplate to the module.

Compatible Modules SIGA Series Modules (Table A)

Compatible Electrical BoxesNorth American 2-1/2" (64 mm) Deep 2-Gang BoxStandard 4" Square Box 1-1/2" (38 mm) Deep BoxEuropean 100 mm Square Box

Transponder Mounting Bracket, SIGA-MB4

CA

T N

O.

SIG

A-M

CC

1

4733

8735

2E

DW

AR

DS

SY

ST

EM

S T

EC

HN

OLO

GY


387352P

9810

PRODUCT INFORMATION

SIGA-MCC1

SPECIFICATIONS


DATE: 08/17/98

INSTALLATION SHEET:


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0



SIGA-MCC1Single Input Signal Module

Operating Voltage Range 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc

Standby Current 223 µΑ

Activated Current 100 µA

Output Ratings24 Vdc 2 A25 V audio 50 W70 V audio 35 WEOL Resistor Value 47 KΩ







The SIGA-MCC1 is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it contains no user-servicable parts and should not be disassembled.


2 Verify that the Signature Data Circuit (SDC) is correctly connected to TB7.

3 Plug the SIGA-MCC1 into any available position in the motherboard.


5 Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring instructions of this installation sheet (next page).

6 Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided and apply the label to the module.

7 Peel off the removable bar coded serial number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate location in the Serial Number Logbook.


Description

The SIGA-MCC1 Single Input Signal Module is an addressable Signature Series component used to connect a supervised output circuit to the signal riser. The SIGA-MCC1 does not supervise the riser; the fire alarm panel must provide this function. Upon command from the Signature controller, the SIGA-MCC1 connects the output circuit to the riser input, which may be: 24 Vdc to operate polarized audible and visual appliances, 25 Vac or 70 Vac to operate audio evacuation circuits, or telephone audio.

Note: See the programming information, below, for definitions of the personality codes.

Diagnostic LEDs provide a visible indication of module status. A flashing green LED indicates normal status. A flashing red LED indicates the alarm/active state.

The SIGA-MCC1 plugs into any available module space on a SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard, and captive screws secure it to the motherboard. All module wiring is made to terminals on the motherboard.

The personality code downloaded to the module by the Signature controller during system configuration determines the function performed by the SIGA-MCC1. The SIGA-MCC1 requires one module address, which the Signature controller assigns to it. A custom address can be assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No addressing switches are used.

Personality Code 5: Riser Selector (Single Input)Personality code 5 configures the SIGA-MCC1 as a signal power (24 Vdc) or audio evacuation (25 or 70 Vac) riser selector, and disables the ring-tone generator. The output is monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a short exists, the control panel inhibits the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit, so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault.

Personality Code 6: Riser Selector (Single Input), Ring-tonePersonality code 6 configures the SIGA-MCC1 as a telephone riser selector. When a telephone handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its hook, the SIGA-MCC1 will generate its own ring-tone signal. A separate ring-tone riser is not needed. The module sends a signal to the control panel to indicate that an off-hook condition is present, and waits for the system operator to respond to the call. When the system operator responds, the ring-tone signal is disabled and the telephone is connected to the telephone riser.

Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-CC1.

? PROGRAMMING Disconnect power to the cabinets before removing or installing components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life.

Warning!

! Caution!





Riser 1 Out

Riser 1 OutRiser 1 In

4321

TB14

TB15Green LED (Normal)

SIGA-MCC1

No connections required for SIGA-MCC1. Other modules may require connections.

1 2

Riser 1 In

Red LED (Active)

CA

T N

O.

SIG

A-M

CC

1

47

33

87

35

2E

DW

AR

DS

SY

ST

EM

S T

EC

HN

OL

OG

Y

WIRING

UL/ULC Listed47KΩ EOL




Typical Telephone Circuit



Transient Protection Caution

4321

1 2 3 4

PersonalityCode 5

PersonalityCode 5

PersonalityCode 6

!

1 The SIGA-MCC1 will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

2 The personality code for the SIGA-MCC1 is factory set to 5.

3 The SIGA-MCC1 does not support conventional smoke detectors.

Warnings

SIGA-UIOR series motherboard individual Riser 1 connection. Install the jumpers between adjacentmodules that use the same riser.


Install the Bi-Polar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P) here. Refer to the Transient Protection Caution above.


The SIGA-MCC1 requires transient protection for installations that connect electromechanical bells or horns to output circuits. The module's circuitry requires a bi-polar transient protector (P/N 235196P) for protection against transient spikes caused by the inductive load of bells or horns.



3

1

2

4

5

6

7

Data Out

SignatureData

Circuit

TB7

Data In

4321

36

8

7

For maximum resistance, see the appropriate technical reference manual. Maximum circuit capacitance is 0.1µF.

Supervised and power limited when connected to a power limited source. If the source is non-power limited, power limited marking shall be eliminated.



2 2Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm ).

See the Signature controller installation sheet for wiring specifications.

The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14.



Notes

+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

1 2 3 4

9

4 97 8

975

Installation Sheet 30JUN03 P/N: 387355 REV: 3.0 SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module 1 / 4

SIGA-MCC1S

Auto-Sync Output Module Product description

The Auto-Sync Output Module is an intelligent, analog-addressable component of the Signature Series. The Auto-Sync Output Module requires one device address and connects a supervised output circuit to a signal riser. Upon command from the Signature loop controller, the Auto-Sync Output Module connects the output circuit to the riser input. The output circuit energizes a riser to operate:

• 24 Vdc polarized audible and visual notification appliances (see note 1 below)

• 25 Vac audible evacuation circuits • 70 Vac audible evacuation circuits • Telephone audio

Notes

1. The output circuit uses a resynchronizing feature to operate polarized notification appliances if they are compatible with Genesis series products. See the compatibility section below.

2. The Auto-Sync Output Module does not supervise the 24 Vdc riser; the fire alarm control panel provides this function.

Personality codes System controller compatibility

Signature Series modules require personality codes, downloaded from the Signature loop controller, to determine their operational features. The Auto-Sync Output Module is compatible with the personality codes described below.

Personality code 5: Single-input riser selector

Personality code 5 configures the module as a signal power (24 Vdc) riser selector. The output wiring is monitored for open circuits and short circuits. A short circuit causes the fire alarm control panel to inhibit the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault.

Personality code 6: Riser selector (single-input) ring-tone

Personality code 6 configures the module as a telephone riser selector. When a telephone handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its hook, the Auto-Sync Output Module generates its own ring-tone signal. A separate ring-tone riser is unnecessary. The module sends this signal to the control panel

to indicate the presence of an off-hook condition, and waits for the system operator to respond to the call. When the system operator responds, the ring-tone signal is disabled.

Personality Code 25: Auto sync output (default)

Personality code 25 configures the module to provide synchronization of compatible fire alarm signals across multiple zones. The output wiring is monitored for open circuits and short circuits. A short circuit causes the fire alarm control panel to inhibit the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault. Personality code 25 is only compatible with EST3, ADT3000, and XLS1000 panels.

Note: You may use nonsynchronous fire alarm signals with or instead of compatible synchronized fire alarm signals, but the operation of these devices will not comply with UL 1971.

Specifications Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Current

Standby: 223 µA Activated: 100 µA

Output ratings 24 Vdc (telephone riser also): 2 A 25 Vac audio: 50 W 70 Vac audio: 35 W EOL resistor value: 47 kΩ

Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C) Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °F) Construction: High impact engineering polymer Shipping weight: 0.22 lb (0.10 kg) Mounting: UIO2R, UIO6, or UIO6R motherboard Synchronization: Meets UL1971 synchronization requirement.

All signaling devices signal within 0.01 seconds of each other for a period of at least two hours while maintaining a one hertz signal rate. (For list of compatible devices, see Compatible device table.)

Note: For synchronization, the maximum resistance between any two devices is 20 Ω. See the voltage specifications for the Auto-Sync Output Module, the signaling device, and the control panel to determine the maximum allowable wire resistance.

Number of devices

Strobe candela rating Maximum strobes

15, 15PS, 5A 29

30, 15/75, 7A, 3A 16

60, 75PS, 6A 11

75 10

110, 8A 8

P/N: 387355 REV: 3.0 30JUN03 Installation Sheet 2 / 4 SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module

Installation instructions To install the module:

1. Install the Signature motherboard (UIO2R, UIO6, or UIO6R). See the motherboard installation sheet for more information.

2. Plug the module into any available position on the Signature motherboard.

3. Secure the module to the motherboard with the two captive screws on the module.

4. Wire the module according to the instructions in the wiring diagram.

5. Write the address assigned to the module on the label and apply it to the module.

6. Remove the bar-coded serial number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number log book.

Notes

• The factory ships the Auto-Sync Output Module as an assembled unit; it contains no user-servicable parts and should not be disassembled.

• Install in accordance with applicable requirements of the latest editions of the NFPA codes and standards, the Canadian Electrical Code (Part 1, Section 32), and the authority having jurisdiction.

Warnings

• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life. Dangerous voltages may be present at the terminals even when power is shut off!

• This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

• This module does not support conventional smoke detectors.

Caution: Observe static sensitive material handling practices.

LEDs Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the module.

Status LED indicator

Normal/Trouble Green LED flashes

Short/Active Red LED flashes

Transient protection caution The Auto-Sync Output Module requires transient protection for installations that connect electromechanical bells or horns to output circuits. The module's circuitry requires a bipolar transient protector (P/N 235196P) for protection against transient spikes caused by the inductive load of bells or horns.

Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across the terminals of the bell or horn electrically closest to the module. The bipolar transient protector is not polarity-sensitive.



Installation Sheet 30JUN03 P/N: 387355 REV: 3.0 SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module 3 / 4

Wiring diagram

4321

TB14

TB15

1 2 3 4

Individual riser connectionInstall the jumpers between adjacent modules that use the same riser.

1 2

TB7

Green LED (normal/trouble)Red LED (active/short)

Data out

Signaturedatacircuit

Data in

4321

No connections required for the Auto-Sync Output Module. Other modules may require connections.

Auto-Sync Output Module

+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

Personality codes 5 and 25: typical notification appliance circuit

Riser 1 out

Riser 1 in

4321

Personality code 6: typical telephone circuit

Personality code 5: typical speaker circuit

Riser out

+_Signature motherboard (UIO2R, UIO6, or UIO6R)

UL/ULClisted47 kEOL

Ω

Riser in

[1][3][8][9]

[3][5][7]

[3][6]

[4][2]

See the UIO2R or UIO6(R) installation sheet for additional instructions and details about:

• Terminal connections• Separation of power-limited and

nonpower-limited wiring

UL/ULClisted47 kEOL

Ω

UL/ULClisted47 kEOL

Ω[10]

Notes [1] Supervised


[3] Power-limited unless connected to a nonpower-limited source. If the source is nonpower-limited, eliminate the power-limited mark and: • Maintain a 1/4 in (6.4 mm) space from power-limited wiring or • Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable in accordance with the National Electric Code

[4] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for wiring specifications

[5] The UIO6R does not come with TB14. Modules connect to the riser through individual terminals (TB8 through TB13).

[6] The UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13. All modules connect to the riser through TB14.

[7] The input for this riser is common to all modules

[8] Polarity shown in supervisory condition. Polarity changes on alarm.

[9] Maximum 25 Ω resistance, 0.1 µF capacitance per wire

[10] Transient protection (see “Transient protection caution” above)

P/N: 387355 REV: 3.0 30JUN03 Installation Sheet 4 / 4 SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module

Compatibility The Auto-Sync Output Module is compatible with Genesis, Enhanced Integrity (synchronized), and Enhanced Integrity Power Saver (synchronized) models.



Genesis strobes *G1-V15, *G1R-V15, *G1-V30, *G1R-V30, *G1-V60, *G1R-V60, *G1-V75, *G1R-V75, *G1-V110, *G1R-V110

Genesis horn strobes, high output *G1-HOV15, *G1R-HOV15, *G1-HOV30, *G1R-HOV30, *G1-HOV60, *G1R-HOV60, *G1-HOV75, *G1R-HOV75, *G1-HOV110, *G1R-HOV110

Genesis horn strobes, low output *G1-HV15, *G1R-HV15, *G1-HV30, *G1R-HV30, *G1-HV60, *G1R-HV60, *G1-HV75, *G1R-HV75

Genesis wall speakers strobe *G4-S2VM, *G4R-S2VM, *G4-S7VM, *G4R-S7VM

Subsitute XLS or ADT for *



Integrity mini strobes, synchronized *202-15PS, *202-15PSW, *202-75PS, *202-75PSW, *202-3A-T, *202-3A-TW, *202-5A-T, *202-5A-TW, *202-7A-T, *202-7A-TW, *202-8A-T, *202-8A-TW

Integrity strobes, four inch square box 405-15PS, 405-15PSW, *405-3A-T, *405-3A-TW, *405-5A-T, *405-5A-TW, 405-6A-T, 405-6A-TW, 405-75PS, 405-75PSW, *405-7A-T, *405-7A-TW, *405-8A-T, *405-8A-TW, CS405-7A-T, CS405-8A-T

Integrity chime strobes *757-3A-CS, *757-3A-CSW, *757-5A-CS, *757-5A-CSW, *757-7A-CS, *757-7A-CSW, *757-8A-CS, *757-8A-CSW

Integrity horn strobes, temporal 757-7A-T, 757-7A-TW, 757-8A-T, 757-8A-TW

Integrity speaker strobes *757-3A-SS25, *757-3A-SS25W, *757-3A-SS70, *757-3A-SS70W, *757-5A-SS25, *757-5A-SS25W, *757-5A-SS70, *757-5A-SS70W, *757-7A-SS25, *757-7A-SS25W, *757-7A-SS70, *757-7A-SS70W, *757-8A-SS25, *757-8A-SS25W, *757-8A-SS70, *757-8A-SS70W

Integrity speaker strobes, re-entrant wall mount

*757-3A-RS25, *757-3A-RS25W, *757-3A-RS70, *757-3A-RS70W, *757-7A-RS25, *757-7A-RS25W, *757-7A-RS70, *757-7A-RS70W, *757-8A-RS25, *757-8A-RS25W, *757-8A-RS70, *757-8A-RS70W

Integrity speaker strobes, ceiling mount 25V

*964-3A-4RR, *964-3A-4RW, *964-3A-8RW, 964-3A-8SW, *964-5A-4RR, *964-5A-4RW, *964-5A-8RW, 964-5A-8SW, *964-7A-4RR, *964-7A-4RW, *964-7A-8RW, 964-7A-8SW, *964-8A-4RR, *964-8A-4RW, *964-8A-8RW, 964-8A-8SW

Integrity speaker strobes, ceiling mount 70V

*965-3A-4RR, *965-3A-4RW, *965-3A-8RW, 965-3A-8SW, *965-5A-4RR, *965-5A-4RW, *965-5A-8RW, 965-5A-8SW, *965-7A-4RR, *965-7A-4RW, *965-7A-8RW, 965-7A-8SW, *965-8A-4RR, *965-8A-4RW, *965-8A-8RW, 965-8A-8SW

Bell strobes adapter plate *403-3A-R, *403-5A-R, *403-7A-R, *403-8A-R

Power-saver speaker strobes *757S2-15PS, *757S2-15PSW, *757S7-15PS, *757S7-15PSW, *757S2-75PS, *757S2-75PSW, *757S7-75PS, *757S7-75PSW

Subsitute XLS for *

CA

T N

O.

SIG

A-M

CC

2

4733

8735

3E

DW

AR

DS

SY

ST

EM

S T

EC

HN

OLO

GY


387353P

9810

PRODUCT INFORMATION

SIGA-MCC2

SPECIFICATIONS


DATE: 08/17/98

INSTALLATION SHEET:


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0



SIGA-MCC2Dual Input Signal Module

Operating Voltage Range 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc

Standby Current 223 µΑ

Activated Current 100 µA

Output Ratings24 Vdc 2 A25 V Audio 50 W70 V Audio 35 WEOL Resistor Value 47 KΩ







The SIGA-MCC2 is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it contains no user-servicable parts and should not be disassembled.


2 Verify that the Signature Data Circuit (SDC) is properly connected to TB7.

3 Plug the SIGA-MCC2 into any available position on the motherboard.


5 Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring instructions of this installation sheet (next page).

6 Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided and apply the label to the module.

7 Peel off the removable bar coded serial number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate location in the Serial Number Logbook.


DESCRIPTION

The SIGA-MCC2 Dual Input Signal Module is an addressable Signature Series component, which connects supervised output circuits to signal risers 1 and 2. The SIGA-MCC2 does not supervise the riser; the fire alarm panel must provide this function. Upon command from the Signature controller, the SIGA-MCC2 connects the output circuit to the riser input, which may be 24 Vdc, to operate polarized audible and visual appliances, or 25/70 Vac, to operate audio evacuation circuits.

During system configuration, the Signature controller downloads the personality code, which determines the function performed by the SIGA-MCC2, and automatically assigns the two addresses it requires. A custom address can be assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No addressing switches are used.

Note: See the programming information, below, for the definitions of the personality codes.

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of module status. A flashing green LED indicates normal status. A flashing red LED indicates the alarm/active state.

The SIGA-MCC2 plugs into any available module space on a SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard, and captive screws secure it to the board. All wiring connections are made to terminals on the motherboard.

? PROGRAMMING

Personality Code 7: Riser Selector (Dual Input)Personality code 7 configures the SIGA-MCC2 as a one of two output signal power (24 Vdc) or audio evacuation (25 or 70 Vac) riser selector. Each output circuit is monitored for open and shorted wiring. If a short exists, the control panel inhibits the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault.

Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-CC2.

Disconnect power to the cabinets before removing or installing components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life.

Warning!

! Caution!





Riser 1 Out

Riser 2 Out

Riser 1 Out

TB14



SIGA-MCC2

1 2

Riser 1 In

Riser 2 In

Riser 1 In

Red LED (Active)

CA

T N

O.

SIG

A-M

CC

2

47

33

87

35

3E

DW

AR

DS

SY

ST

EM

S T

EC

HN

OL

OG

Y

WIRING

1 The SIGA-MCC2 will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

2 The personality code for the SIGA-MCC2 is factory set to 7.

3 The SIGA-MCC2 does not support conventional smoke detectors.

Warnings

Notes





1 2 3 4

4321

4321

1 2 3 4

PersonalityCode 7

PersonalityCode 7

SIGA-UIOR series motherboard individual Riser 1 connection. Install the jumpers between adjacent modules that use the same riser.


The SIGA-MCC2 requires transient protection for installations that connect electromechanical bells or horns to output circuits. The module's circuitry requires a bi-polar transient protector (P/N 235196P) for protection against transient spikes caused by the inductive load of bells or horns.




Transient Protection Caution!

For maximum resistance, see the appropriate technical reference manual. Maximum circuit capacitance is 0.1 µF.

Supervised and power limited when connected to a power limited source. If the source is non-power limited, power-limited marking shall be eliminated.



2 2Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm ).

See the Signature controller installation sheet for wiring specifications.

The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14.



3

1

2

4

5

6

7

Data Out

TB7


Data In

4321

36

8

7

7 8 9

7 8 9

7 9

+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

+ +

_ _

9

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387358P REV: 2.0 SIGA-MCR - Control Relay 1 / 2

SIGA-MCR Control Relay

Product description

The SIGA-MCR Control Relay is an addressable Signature Series component. A Form C dry contact relay in the SIGA-MCR can control equipment shutdown or external appliances such as door closers, fans, and dampers. The system firmware ensures that the relay is in the proper ON/OFF state. The SIGA-MCR relay energizes on command from the Signature controller.

The SIGA-MCR requires one device address, which the Signature controller automatically assigns. A custom address can be assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No addressing switches are used.

Note: See “Programming,” below, for the application and definition of personality code 8.

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the module status:


The SIGA-MCR plugs into any available module space on a SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard, and captive screws secure it to the board. All wiring connections are made to terminals on the motherboard.

Specifications Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Standby current: 100 µA Activated current: 100 µA Contact rating (pilot duty) 30 Vdc: 2 A 120 Vac: 0.5 A Relay type: Form C Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C) Operating humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing Mounting: SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard Construction: High impact engineering polymer Shipping weight: 0.10 lb (0.05 kg) Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Programming Personality Code 8: Dry contact output

The SIGA-MCR is assigned personality code 8 at the factory, which configures the module as an output dry contact relay.

Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-CR.


Installation instructions The SIGA-MCR is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled.


1. Install the SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard according to its installation sheet.

2. Verify that the Signature loop is properly connected to TB7.

3. Plug the SIGA-MCR into any available position on the motherboard.

4. Secure the module to the motherboard with both of its captive screws.

5. Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring diagram shown below.

6. Write the module's address on the label provided and apply the label to the module.

7. Peel off the removable bar-coded serial number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Refer to the UIO motherboard installation sheets for wire routing information.

P/N: 387358P REV: 2.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet 2 / 2 SIGA-MCR - Control Relay

Wiring diagram

4321

4321

TB14

TB15Green LED (normal)

Red LED (active)

TB7

4321

[1] [5]

Data out

Data in

CAT

NO

.S

IGA

-MC

R

4733

8735

8

[2] [6]

1 2 3 4

[3]

[4]

SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboardSIGA-MCR

Normally open Normally closedCommon

1 2 3 4

No connections required for SIGA-MCR. Other modules may require connections.

No connections required for SIGA-MCR. Other modules may require connections.

Notes

[1] Refer to the Signature Controller installation sheet for wiring specifications

[2] Install the SIGA-MCR within the same room as the device it is controlling

[3] The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14

[4] The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13


[6] Power-limited when connected to a power-limited source. If the source is nonpower-limited, power limited marking shall be eliminated.

7. Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; Minimum 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm)

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387359P REV: 2.0 SIGA-MCRR - Control Reversing Relay Module 1 / 2

SIGA-MCRR Control Reversing Relay

Product description

The SIGA-MCRR Control Reversing Relay Module is an addressable Signature Series component used to power and activate the audible sounder in Signature Audible Detector Bases. On command from the Signature controller, the SIGA-MCRR relay energizes, reversing the polarity of its 24 Vdc output.

The SIGA-MCRR requires one device address, which the Signature controller assigns to it automatically. A custom address can be assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No addressing switches are used.

Note: See “Programming,” below, for the application and definition of Personality Code 8.

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of module status:


The SIGA-MCRR plugs into any available module space on a SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard, and captive screws secure it to the board. All wiring connections are made to terminals on the motherboard.


Programming Personality Code 8: Contact output

The SIGA-MCRR is assigned personality code 8 at the factory, which configures the module as an output dry contact relay.

Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-CRR.

Specifications Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Standby current: 100 µA Activated current: 100 µA Contact ratings (pilot duty): 24 Vdc @ 2A Wire gauge: 12 to18 AWG (2.5 to 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and

18 AWG are preferred. Compatible bases: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Operating temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C) Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH, noncondensing Mounting: SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard Construction: High impact engineering polymer Shipping weight: 0.10 lb (0.05 kg) Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation instructions The SIGA-MCRR is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled.


1. Install the SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard according to its installation sheet.

2. Verify that the Signature loop is properly connected to TB7.

3. Plug the SIGA-MCRR into any available position in the motherboard.

4. Secure the module to the motherboard with both of its captive screws.

5. Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring diagram shown below.

6. Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided and apply the label to the module.

7. Peel off the removable bar coded serial number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Refer to the UIO motherboard installation sheets for wire routing information.

P/N: 387359P REV: 2.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet 2 / 2 SIGA-MCRR - Control Reversing Relay Module

Wiring diagram

Data in

—OR— [6]

4321

4321

TB14


Green LED (normal)

Red LED (Active)

Red LED (active)

CAT

NO

.

CAT

NO

.

SIG

A-M

CR

R

4733

8736

0

SIG

A-M

CR

R

4733

8735

9

[2]

1 12 23 34 4

[4]

[5]

[3]

No connections required for SIGA-MCRR. Other modules may require connections.

No connections required for SIGA-MCRR. Other modules may require connections.

No connections required for SIGA-MCRR. Other modules may require

connections.

1 2 3 4


SIGA-MCRR

Optional SIGA-MCRRor SIGA-MCR for

disabling/disconnectingan audible base [6]

UL/ULC listed 24 Vdc power

supply

1 2 3 4

TB7

Data out

Data in

4321

[1] [4]

Signature loop

[3]

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+

IN/O

UT

SIGA-AB4G


supervising module

SIG

+

SIG

-

DAT

A+

IN/O

UT

SIGA-AB4GFirst device Last device

Power in Power out

Polarity reverses when activated

+– + –

Schematic

Notes

[1] Refer to the Signature controller installation sheet for wiring specifications

[2] The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14

[3] The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13


[5] Power-limited when connected to a power-limited source. If the source is nonpower-limited, power-limited marking Must be eliminated.

[6] Alternate wiring of the 24 Vdc power applies when an optional SIGA-MCRR or MCR is used

Installation Sheet 17OCT02 P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector 1 / 8

SIGA-MD(S)Motion Detector

Product description

The Motion Detector module is an intelligent, analog-addressable device that interfaces a motion detector and asecurity or guard tour input to a Signature loop controller. TheSIGA-MDS contains the same circuitry as the SIGA-MD, but itsmounting and wiring require different procedures. See themounting and wiring topics in this installation sheet forcomplete instructions.

The Motion Detector requires two module addresses. Onechannel monitors the PIR (passive infrared) and the tamperswitch in the detector. The second channel provides a securityinput, which can be configured for security or guard tourapplications (per NFPA 72). A single Signature loop canaccommodate up to 62 units.

The Motion Detector provides seven separate coveragepatterns known as curtains. The curtains are actually infraredreflections that extend to 34 ft (10.36 m) and cover a width 4.8ft (1.46 m) each. The coverage patterns, however, areconfigurable to specification. See “Configuring the reflector andwindow” and “Mounting the detector” for more detail.

A coverage test function provides verification for the extent ofcoverage within specific zones covered by the infraredcurtains. A red LED flashes to indicate active motion within acovered zone.

SpecificationsInput voltage: 15.20 to 19.95 VdcCurrent draw

Standby: 600 µAActive: 700 µA

Input circuitEOL resistor: UL/ULC listed 47 kΩMax. resistance: 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)Max. capacitance: 0.1 µFMax. voltage: 18 VdcMax. current: 0.32 mA

CoveragePatterns: Full, right, left, and centerCurtains: Up to 7Range: 34 ft (10.36 m) x 90°

MountingSurface: Flat wall or cornerHeight: Up to 10 ft (3 m)

Address requirement: 2Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Humidity: 10 to 93% noncondensingShipping weight

SIGA-MD: 7.3 oz (207 g)SIGA-MDS: 9.6 oz (272 g)

Construction: High impact polymerColor: White

Note: This unit complies with FCC and DOC requirements.

Personality codesSystem controller compatibility

The Motion Detector requires a Signature loop controller todownload the personality codes that determine how it willoperate. The first channel is user-definable to eight differentpersonalities. The second channel is automatically configuredfor motion detection. The user-definable personality codes forexternal security loops are described below.

Personality code 3: N.O. active, nonlatching relay (guardtour)

Personality code 3 configures the channel 1 input for use withClass B, normally-open (N.O.) contact guard tour devices.When the N.O. contact of the device is closed, an active signalis sent to the loop controller. The active status is nonlatchingand clears when the N.O. input is returned to the opencondition. The panel will report an open circuit as a troublecondition.

Personality code 41: security open with tamper

Personality code 41 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.O. contact for security conditions and aClass B, normally-closed (N.C.) contact for tamper conditions.When the N.O. contact is closed, an active signal is sent to theloop controller; similarly, when the N.C. contact is opened, atamper signal is sent to the loop controller.

Personality code 42: security closed with tamper

Personality code 42 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.C. contact for security conditions and aClass B, N.O. contact for tamper conditions. When the N.C.contact is opened, an active signal is sent to the loopcontroller; similarly, when the N.O. contact is closed, a tampersignal is sent to the loop controller.

Personality code 43: basic security (factory default)

The factory assigns personality code 43 to the channel 1 input.Personality code 43 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.C. contact and/or a Class B, N.O. contactfor security conditions. When the N.C. contact is opened or theN.O. contact of the device is closed, an active signal is sent tothe loop controller.

SIGA-MD SIGA-MDS

P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0 17OCT02 Installation Sheet2 / 8 SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector

Personality code 44: tamper

Personality code 44 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.C. contact and/or a Class B, N.O. contactfor tamper conditions. When the N.C. contact is opened or theN.O. contact is closed, a tamper signal is sent to the loopcontroller.

Personality code 45: security open

Personality code 45 configures the channel 1 input for use witha Class B, N.O. contact. When the N.O. contact is closed, anactive signal is sent to the loop controller. The panel will reportan open circuit as a SecurityFault condition.

Personality code 46: security closed

Personality code 46 configures the channel 1 input for use witha Class B, N.C. contact. When the N.C. contact is opened, anactive signal is sent to the loop controller. The panel will reporta short circuit as a SecurityFault condition.

Personality code 48: security - maintenance

Personality code 48 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.C. contact or a Class B, N.O. contact formaintenance conditions (e.g. a motion detector with a separatemaintenance contact). When the N.C. contact is opened or theN.O. contact is closed, a maintenance signal is sent to the loopcontroller.

Note: See the SDU Online Help (P/N 180653) for additionalprogramming instructions.

Installation instructionsHere are the general steps you'll follow to mount, wire, and testthe Motion Detector. The details of each step are given in theremaining topics of this installation sheet.

1. Disassemble the detector for mounting and wiring.(Remove the access plate, cover, and circuit board.)

2. Mount the base to a flat wall or a corner. (See Figure 1and “Mounting the detector.”)

3. Configure the reflector and window as required for thecoverage you want.

4. Wire the detector and replace the circuit board.

5. Set the jumpers for the required sensitivity and range.

6. Test the detector.

7. Remove the keeper screw and reassemble the cover andaccess plate.

Installation notes

1. For NFPA 72 guard tour applications, mount the MotionDetector to an outlet box.

2. This product is compatible with the EST3 system. Thesystem must provide a minimum of 4 hours standby forsecurity applications and 24 hours standby for fire alarmapplications.

Disassembling the detectorTo disassemble the detector:

1. Use the tab to pull the access plate off of the cover (Figure2).

2. Insert a small, flat-bladed screwdriver in the slot and pushthe handle down to lift the cover off of the base (as shownin Figure 3).

3. Remove the circuit board assembly (Figure 4).

[1][2]

[2] Corner mounting holes[1] Flat wall mounting holes

Corner mounting Wall mounting[2]

[1]

[1]

[1][2] [2]

6 to 10 feet above the floor (1.8 to 3 m)

Figure 1: Mounting locations

Cover

Access plate

TabAccess plate

Figure 2: Removing the access plate

Insert flat-bladed screwdriver here.

Figure 3: Removing the cover


Use a small, flat-bladed screwdriver to lift the circuit board out of the base. Be careful not to damage the circuit board or touch the pyroelectric sensor on the back of the circuit board.

Base (front view)

Base (bottom view) Base (side view)

Pyroelectricsensor

Figure 4: Removing the circuit board assembly

Caution: Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.

Mounting the detectorGeneral guidelines

Mount the detector so the expected movement of an intruderwill cross the fields of detection. (See “Configuring the reflectorand window.”) Remove any object in front of the detector thatmay prevent a clear line of sight. Keep metallic objects at leasttwo feet away from the detector. Avoid locations that exposethe detector to:

• Moving or vibrating objects (fans, pulleys, conveyer belts)• Water spray or corrosive environments• Heat sources in the field of view (heaters, radiators)• Windows in the field of view• Strong air drafts on the detector (fans, air conditioners)• Animals larger than 20 pounds• Blinds, curtains, or drapes• Electronic fields (electric motors, high-voltage equipment)

Mounting the SIGA-MDS

The SIGA-MDS requires a few additional mounting steps.

To mount the SIGA-MDS:

1. Secure the detector to the 1-gang box with two screws(Figure 5).

2. Swivel the detector to the desired angle.

3. Remove the cover from the base.

4. Remove the circuit board to expose the swivel screw. (SeeFigure 4.)

5. Tighten the swivel screw to set the locking clip at thedesired angle.

6. Replace the circuit board. (See Figure 9 and Figure 10.)

7. Snap the cover back onto the base. (See “Reassemblingthe detector.”)

Screw

1-gang mounting box

Mounting the detector

Circuit board

Tighten this screw to set the locking clip at the desired angle.

Tightening the locking clip

Mounting plate

SwivelBase

Cover

Swiveling the detector up and down

Note: Shown in the correct position for maximum range. Any other position may reduce range.

Swiveling the detector left and right

Base

Pyroelectric sensor (Do not touch!)

Cover

Figure 5: SIGA-MDS mounting illustrations


Configuring the reflector and windowYou can remove the infrared reflector to configure the detectorfor the specifications of your job.

To configure the reflector and window:

1. Remove the infrared reflector from the base.

2. If needed, place the undercrawl window mask in the cover.(See Figure 7.)

3. If needed, apply the plastic masks or curtain block stickersto the infrared reflector. (See Figure 8.)

4. Put the infrared reflector back into the base.

10 ft (3.04 m) max.

8 ft (2.44 m)

8 ft (2.44 m) nom.6 ft (1.83 m) min.

25 ft (7.62 m)34 ft (10.36 m)

Zone: 4Coverage: 34 ft (10.36 m)Clearance: None

Zone: 2, 6Coverage: 26 ft (7.92 m)Clearance: 8 ft (2.44 m)

Zone: 1, 3, 5, 7Coverage: 9 ft (2.74 m)Clearance 25 ft (7.62 m)

Width: 4.8 ft (1.46 m)

Width: 4.8 ft (1.46 m)

Width: 4.8 ft (1.46 m)

Mounting heights

76

5

4

3

2

1

Infrared reflector (upside down view)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 734 ft (10.36 m)

You can modify the detector coverage pattern to fit specific applications. Mask zones to avoid sources of false alarms such as heaters, air conditioners, windows, and pets.

Note: Do not apply masks or curtain block stickers to the detector in full coverage applications.

Figure 6: Full coverage

P/N 14367

76 5 2

1

4 3

7.9 ft (2.41 m)

5 ft (1.52 m)

Undercrawl window mask

Motion Detector cover (lower-rear view)

The cardboard undercrawl window mask allows objects to be placed within 5 ft (1.52 m) of the detector or directly below it.

Figure 7: Undercrawl coverage


76

5 4

34 ft (10.36 m)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2

14

34

34 ft (10.36 m)

76

5 4 32

1

3 6

3 673

3

1 2 4 5 6

1 2 4 5 76

34 ft (10.36 m)

Zones 3 and 6 receive no coverage.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2For corridorsand hallways

4

34 ft (10.36 m)

Masking for right-half coverage

Masking for left-half coverage

Masking for unique zone requirements

Masking for center zone coverage

1 2

2981-2B

1

1

2 3 4 5 6 7

2 3 4 5 6 7

Use the plastic masks to mask off wide areas of coverage.

Each zone of coverage requires both numbered (small and large) curtain block stickers.

Plastic masks Adhesive curtain stickers

Caution: Do not use sharp objects to remove unwanted stickers from the infrared detector. Carefully peel off the sticker if it becomes necessary to use the blocked curtain (zone).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

Figure 8: Masked coverage patterns


Wiring the detectorTo wire the SIGA-MD(S):

1. If necessary, remove the circuit board as instructed inFigure 4. Remember to observe electro-static precautions.

2. Remove the wiring knockouts (see Figure 9) on the basefor the wiring.

3. Run the wiring through the wiring knockouts.

4. Connect the wiring to the appropriate terminals at TB1.(See Figure 11 for SIGA-MDS wire runs.)

5. If necessary, lower the circuit board into the base andsnap it securely into place at the locations marked [S] inFigure 9 and Figure 10.

Run wiring as illustrated here.

Top view

Remove these wiring knockouts.

Base

Lower the circuit board assembly andand snap it back into place.

[S]

[S] Snap

[S]

[S]

[S]

TB1

Figure 9: Running wires through the knockouts

Notes for Figure 10 and Figure 11

[1] The Channel 1 input circuit does not require a personalitycode, but it is configurable to personality codes 3, 41, 42,43, 44, 45, 46, or 48.

[2] Class B (Style 4)

[3] 25 Ω resistance per wire, max.

[4] 16 AWG (1.0 sq mm) max. 22 AWG (0.25 sq mm) min.

[5] Listed 47 kΩ EOL resistor

6. All wiring is supervised and power-limited

7. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors.

[8] From Signature loop controller or previous device

[9] To next device

[10] Use a wire nut to connect the Data in (+) and Data out (+)lines to the red Data in/out (+) wire inside the junction box.

1 2 3 4 5 6

TB1

DS1DS2

SENSRange

Normal LED(green)

Active LED (red)

Tamper switch (engaged when the top cover is installed and activated when the cover is removed)

Infrared light reflector (7 curtains)

Apply curtain block stickers to limit the number of detection curtains.

Data in (+)Data in (-)

Data out (+)Data out (-)

Channel 1 input

Motiondetectorcard

Interfacecard

[S] [S]

[S][S]

[1]

[5]

J1 J2

[2][3][4][8]

[9]

Figure 10: SIGA-MD wiring

Red

Black

White

[10]

Figure 11: SIGA-MDS factory installed wiring

Table 1: SIGA-MDS wire color codes

Color Wire path

Field installed Channel 1 in

Field installed Channel 1 out

Black Data in (-)

Red Data in/out (+)

White Data out (-)

See Table 1 for wiringcolor codes.



1/4 in (~6 mm)

Strip 1/4 inch (about 6 mm) from the ends of ALL wires thatconnect to the terminal block of the module.

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection

Channel 1 input

Basic security

N.C. with tamper

N.O. with tamper

Guard tour [3]

5 6TB1

[1]

Tamper

Alarm

Alarm

Tamper

[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]

Notes[1] See the previous page for notes that apply to the

Channel 1 input.

[2] Listed 47 k EOL resistor

[3] UL/ULC listed

Ω

guard tour station

Figure 12: Security circuits

WARNINGS

• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removingcomponents. Failure to do so may result in serious injury orloss of life.

• This module will not operate without electrical power. As firesfrequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discussfurther safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.


Setting the jumpers

Jumper Settings

J1 SENS Determines the detector sensitivity

BI: Bicurtain mode (not UL listed) increases falsealarm immunity by requiring the intruder to passthrough two curtains to trigger an alarm. Do notuse BI for single-curtain applications or rangesunder 5 ft (1.52 m).

STD: Standard mode handles wide-angle orsingle-curtain applications. The intruder onlyneeds to pass through one curtain to trigger analarm.

J2 Range Determines the detector range. Make sure thejumper is in the 34 ft (10.36 m) position beforeoperation.

J1 J2

Sensitivity selection Range selection

Standard

34 ft (10.36 m) range

N/A

Bicurtain

Figure 13: Jumper settings

Testing the detectorConducting a coverage test

The coverage test allows for verification of the extent ofcoverage within a space.

The detector remains in the coverage test mode while thecover is removed and for approximately 2 minutes after youreplace it. If the detector returns to normal before you make allthe adjustments, return to step 2 for additional time.

The Motion Detector will stay in alarm for approximately threeseconds after each alarm.

To conduct a coverage test:

1. Disable the device if you do not want a tamper or activeindication at the fire alarm panel.

2. Remove the cover (Figure 3). This activates the tamperswitch, which puts the detector in the coverage test mode.

3. Reinstall the cover.

4. Test each curtain for proper operation by walking througheach section in the space. The red coverage test LED(Figure 14) flashes on each alarm.

5. Make adjustments to the curtain coverage as necessary.

6. Re-enable the detector at the fire alarm panel if youdisabled it before testing.


Coverage test LED

J1 J2

Figure 14: Coverage test LED

Maintaining the detector

The Motion Detector, if properly installed and used, will provideyears of service with minimal maintenance. Conduct acoverage test annually as described here to verify properoperation.

Clean the cover with a water-dampened cloth as needed tokeep the detector free of dust and dirt. Always test the detectorafter you clean it.

Reassembling the detectorTo assemble the detector:

1 Remove the keeper screw from the base (Figure 15).

2 Join the cover and the base at bottom as shown below(Figure 16).

3 Snap the cover shut at the top of the base.

4 Remove the access plate from the cover (Figure 17).

5 Secure the cover to the base with the keeper screw youremoved in step 1.

6 Replace the access plate.

Remove the keeper screw and use it to secure the detector cover.

Figure 15: Finding the keeper screw

BaseCover

Join the cover and the base here.

Snap the cover and the base together here.

Figure 16: Snapping the cover onto the base

Keeperscrew

Figure 17: Securing the cover to the base

PRODUCT INFORMATION

SIGA-MDM

SPECIFICATIONS

DATE: 08/21/98

INSTALLATION SHEET:


REVISION LEVEL: 1.1

CREATED BY: M. Rimes

APPROVED BY: P. Decker

SIGA-MDM Signature Digital Message Module

Power RequirementsStandby 8 mA @ 18 - 26.4 Vdc, (610 µA SDC)Record/Playback 20 mA (420 µA SDC)Annunciate 20 mA (420 µA SDC)

MessagesQuantity 2Length 30 seconds each

AudioBandwidth 400 Hz to 2.8 kHz +3/-6 dB, ref. 1 kHzDistortion <2% @ 1 kHz

Audio InputMicrophone 20 mVrms max. via front panel stereo jackLine-Level 200 mVrms max. via front panel stereo jack

Audio OutputRiser 1 Vrms into 600 Ω (min.) load with wiring

impedance of 50 Ω/0.4 µF (max.)Riser Supervision DC Supervision by upstream MDM, 47 KΩ

EOLFront Panel 1 Vrms 16 Ω 3.5 mm stereo jackMulti-Unit CascadePriority Active downstream unit has priority

Remote Control Functions Playback and message select via SDC

Local Control Functions Message Select, Input Level Select, Record, and Local Playback

Module LED Indicators Record mode, Play mode, and Excessive input level

SignatureAddress Requirement 2 addressesPersonality Emulate SIGA-CC2Control Low Address = off/play; High Address =

Msg 1/Msg 2

Mounting 1 Space in SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard

Operational EnvironmentTemperature 32 to 100 °F (0 to 38 °C)Humidity 0 to 93% RH

Weight 0.18 lb (0.08 kg)

Description

The SIGA-MDM is a voice quality audio message record and playback module. One or two 30-second messages can be stored in the module's non-volatile EEPROM memory. Control of the SIGA-MDM is via the Signature Data circuit (SDC), from instructions programmed in the host panel. Manual record and play switches are provided on the front of the module for recording and test purposes. The module features low and line level audio inputs through a front panel jack. The pre-amp level audio output is available on the motherboard terminals. An audio output jack is provided on the front panel for monitoring the audio output using headphones or an external speaker .

Multiple SIGA-MDMs can be cascaded to provide multiple message outputs. The output of the MDM is DC supervised with an EOL resistor.

The SIGA-MDM mounts on any SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard.


1 Plug the SIGA-MDM into any available position on the motherboard.

DIGITAL MESSAGE MODULE

CAT. NO. SIGA-MDM


REFER TO 387470 REV X.X

FOR RATING AND

INSTALLATION INFORMATION

PLAY

REC.

MIC./LINE

IN

HEAD

PHONES

1MSG

2

CLIP

MIC.

LINE

SDC

NORMAL

ACTIVE


Warning!


! Caution!


1 These instructions apply to any SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard.

2 The motherboard shown above is a SIGA-UIO2R.

3 See the applicable installation sheets for detailed wire routing information on the different SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboards.

Notes

2 Secure the module to the motherboard with the captive screws.

4321

4321

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

P1 P2

TB1 TB2

TB7

TB8 TB9

TB15PLAY

REC.

MIC./LINE

IN

HEAD

PHONES

MSG1

2

CLIP

MIC.

LINE

SDC

NORMAL

ACTIVE

PLAY

REC.

MIC./LINE

IN

HEAD

PHONES

MSG1

2

CLIP

MIC.

LINE

SDC

NORMAL

ACTIVE




P1 P2

TB1 TB2

TB7

TB8 TB9

TB15

P1 P2

TB1 TB2

TB7

TB8 TB9

TB15

WIRING

387470.CDR Page 2 of 2

Single Cascaded Audio Riser

Separate Audio Risers

1

1

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

5

5

IN OUTUL/ULCListed47 kΩEOL

Audio Preamp Riser

24 Vdc ToOther Loads

24 VdcFrom Power Supply

DownstreamJumper

To OtherSIGA Devices

ToSignatureLoopController(SLC)

ToSignatureLoopController(SLC)

_

_

+

+

IN

UL/ULCListed47 kΩEOL

Audio PreampRiser 1 Out

Audio PreampRiser 2 Out

24 Vdc ToOther Loads

24 VdcFrom Power Supply

DownstreamJumper

To OtherSIGA Devices

_+

_+

_+

_+

_+

_+


Strip 1/4" from the ends of ALL wires that connect to the terminal blocks of the motherboard.

Caution:Exposing more than 1/4" of wire may cause a ground fault.Exposing less than 1/4" of wire may result in a faulty connection.

1/4" (6.4 mm)

Notes

Do not install on the first/single SIGA-MDM audio preamp riser.

1

2

3

4

5

6


Remove suitcase jumpers.

Jumpers must be installedon all downstream SIGA-MDMmodules.

All wiring must be within the same room.

Supervised and power limited if connected to a power limited source. If the source is non-power limited, power limited marking shall be eliminated.

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

4321

4321

4321

4321

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 41 2 3 4

PLAY

REC.

MIC./LINE

IN

HEAD

PHONES

MSG1

2

CLIP

MIC.

LINE

SDC

NORMAL

ACTIVE

PLAY

REC.

MIC./LINE

IN

HEAD

PHONES

MSG1

2

CLIP

MIC.

LINE

SDC

NORMAL

ACTIVE

PLAY

REC.

MIC./LINE

IN

HEAD

PHONES

MSG1

2

CLIP

MIC.

LINE

SDC

NORMAL

ACTIVE

PLAY

REC.

MIC./LINE

IN

HEAD

PHONES

MSG1

2

CLIP

MIC.

LINE

SDC

NORMAL

ACTIVE

Installation Sheet 12JUN02 P/N: 387350 REV: 2.0SIGA-MIO - Input/Output Module 1 / 4

SIGA-MIOInput/Output Module

Product description

The Input/Output Module is an intelligent analog-addressablecomponent of Signature Series. The Input/Output Modulerequires one module address and provides the followingmodes of operation:

• Output with monitor input (personality codes 31 and 32)

• Input/programmable output (personality codes 33through 40)

Personality codes downloaded to the Input/Output Moduleduring system configuration determine its function. TheSignature loop controller automatically assigns an address tothe Input/Output Module, but it will accept custom addressassignments from a laptop computer.

SpecificationsOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcCurrent

Standby: 250 AActivated: 430 A

Contact ratings (pilot duty)24 Vdc: 2 A120 AC: 0.5 A

Relay type: Form A or BInitiating Device Circuit (IDC)

EOL (end-of-line) resistor: UL/ULC listed 47 kMax. circuit resistance: 50 (25 per wire)Max. circuit capacitance: 0.1 F

Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Construction: High impact engineering polymerMounting: UIO2R or UIO6R motherboardShipping weight: 0.22 lb (0.10 kg)

Warnings• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing


• This module will not operate without electrical power. Asfires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest youdiscuss further safeguards with your local fire protectionspecialist.

• This module does not support conventional smokedetectors.


Signature Series modules require personality codes,downloaded from the Signature loop controller, to determinetheir operational features. The Input/Output Module iscompatible with the personality codes described below.

Personality code 31 (factory default): N.O. relay outputwith monitor input

Personality code 31 configures the Input/Output Module as anormally-open output relay contact that requires a maintaineddry contact input activation. The activation must take placewithin a time period defined by the user (15 second default, 5to 120 second selectable) after the output circuit activation. Ifthe fire alarm control panel does not receive a monitor inputwithin the specified time, it will generate a trouble condition.

Personality code 32: N.C. relay output with monitor input

Personality code 32 operates the same as personality code 31,except that the output is configured as a normally-closed, dry-contact relay.

Personality code 33: N.O. relay output with alarm latchinginput (Class B)

Personality code 33 configures the Input/Output Module as anormally-open, dry-contact relay and an alarm latching inputfor Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact ofthe initiating device changes state, the I/O module sends analarm signal to the Signature loop controller and the alarmcondition is latched at the module. The output must beprogrammed to be activated by the panel.

Personality code 34: N.C. relay output with alarm latchinginput (Class B)


Personality code 35: N.O. relay output with delayed alarmlatching input (Class B)

Personality code 35 configures the Input/Output Module as anormally-open, dry-contact relay and an alarm latching inputfor Class B contact initiating devices. This personality requiresthat a change in the state of the initiating device be maintainedfor approximately 16 seconds before the I/O module sends analarm signal to the Signature loop controller. The alarm

P/N: 387350 REV: 2.0 12JUN02 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGA-MIO - Input/Output Module

condition is latched at the module, and the output must beprogrammed to be activated by the panel. Personality code 35is only for use with non-retarded, normally-open waterflowalarm switches.

Personality code 36: N.C. relay output with delayed alarmlatching input (Class B)

Personality code 36 operates the same as personality code 35,except that the output is configured as a normally-closed, dry-contact relay. Personality code 36 is only for use with non-retarded, normally-closed waterflow alarm switches.

Personality code 37: N.O. relay output with active non-latching input (Class B)

Personality code 37 configures the Input/Output Module as anormally-open, dry-contact relay and an active latching inputfor Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact ofthe initiating device changes state, the I/O module sends anactive signal to the Signature loop controller. The active signaldoes not latch, and restores when the input device returns toits normal state. The output must be programmed to beactivated by the panel. Personality code 37 is typically used formonitoring normally-open fans, dampers, doors, etc.

Personality codes 38: N.C. relay output with active non-latching input (Class B)

Personality code 38 operates the same as personality code 37,except that the output is configured as a normally-closed, dry-contact relay. Personality code 38 is typically used formonitoring normally-closed fans, dampers, doors, etc.

Personality code 39: N.O. relay output with active latchinginput (Class B)

Personality code 39 configures the Input/Output Module as anormally-open, dry-contact relay and an active latching inputfor Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact ofthe initiating device changes state, the I/O module sends anactive signal to the Signature loop controller and the activecondition is latched at the module. The output must beprogrammed to be activated by the panel.

Personality code 40: N.C. relay output with active latchinginput (Class B)


LEDsDiagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of themodule.


Normal/Trouble Green LED flashes

Active/Alarm Red LED flashes



Note: The factory ships the Input/Output Module as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.

To install the Input/Output module:

1. Install the Signature motherboard (UIO2R or UIO6R). Seethe motherboard installation sheet for more information.

2. Plug the Input/Output Module into any available positionon the Signature motherboard.

3. Secure the module to the motherboard with the twocaptive screws on the module.

4. Wire the module according to the instructions in the wiringdiagram.

5. Write the address assigned to the module on the label andapply it to the module.

6. Remove the bar-coded serial number label from themodule and apply it to the appropriate location in the serialnumber log book.

Installation Sheet 12JUN02 P/N: 387350 REV: 2.0SIGA-MIO - Input/Output Module 3 / 4

Wiring diagram

4321

TB15

1 2 3 4

Remove motherboard jumpers

1 2 3 4

[1] [4]

TB7

Green LED (Normal/Trouble)Red LED (Active/Alarm)

Data Out


Data In

[3]

4321

No connections required for SIGA-MIO. Other modules may require connections.

Input/Output Module

Signature Series motherboard (UIO2R or UIO6R)

[5]

TB1 through TB6

TB8 through TB13

[2]

[4]

Dry contact relay[6][7]

Input/Output Module (personality codes 31 - 40)

Notes

[1] Maximum 25 resistance per wire. Maximum circuitcapacitance of 0.1 F.

[2] 10 Vdc @ 350 A, max



[5] UL/ULC listed 47 k EOL

[6] System programming determines whether contact will benormally-open (N/O) or normally-closed (N/C)


• Maintain a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) space from power-limitedwiring.

or


[8] See the UIO2R or UIO6R installation sheet for additionalinstructions about the separation of power-limited andnonpower-limited wiring

P/N: 387350 REV: 2.0 12JUN02 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGA-MIO - Input/Output Module

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387057P REV: 7.0SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module 1 / 4

SIGA-MM1Monitor Module

Product description

1234

78

The SIGA-MM1 Dual Input Module is a component of theSignature Series. The SIGA-MM1 is an analog addressabledevice used to connect a Class B normally open monitor typedry contact initiating device circuit (IDC) to a Signature loopcontroller. One device address is required.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-MM1automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to themodule via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.



Mounting

The SIGA-MM1 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.


The SIGA-MM1 requires the Signature loop controller.







Initiating device circuit (IDC)EOL resistor value: 47 KΩ, UL listedMax. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)Max. circuit capacitance (per channel): 0.1 µF

Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-MM1 is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.







Notes





1/4 in (~6 mm)



P/N: 387057P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module



Wiring diagram

(+)

(–)DATA OUT



TB2

TB1



Green LED(normal)

(+)

(–)


DATA IN

1234

78

Notes







Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387057P REV: 7.0SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module 3 / 4

SIGA-MM1Module Moniteur


1234

78

Le Module Moniteur SIGA-MM1 est un composant du système sérieSignature. Le SIGA-MM1 est un dispositif adressable analogiqueutilisé pour relier un Circuit de déclenchement (IDC, Initiating DeviceCircuit) à contact sec normalement ouvert de classe B de typemoniteur, à un contrôleur de boucle Signature. Une adresse dedispositif est nécessaire.

Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement une adresse auSIGA-MM1 ou une adresse particulière peut être assignée au modulevia ordinateur portatif ; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé.



Montage

Le SIGA-MM1 peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nordsimple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîtecarrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeuravec couvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0,et de 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de0,75 mm carrés sont préférables.


Le SIGA-MM1 est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs deboucle Signature.








InstallationNote: Le SIGA-MM1 est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il necontient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas êtredémonté.







Notes




Dénudage des fils

~6 mm 1/4 po ( )



P/N: 387057P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module



Schéma de câblage

(+)

(–)

TB2

TB1

(+)

(–)

[3]

1234

78




UL/ULC

Ω



(Alarme/Actif)

SORTIE DES DONNÉES



N.O. typique

Notes







Figure 1

MODULE SNAP-ONTABS

BLACK METALFRAME

WARNINGS

Mounting modules to the MP1

1. The black metal mounting frame that comes standard with all modules MUST be removed. Squeeze the snap-on tabs that extend from the back of the modules and remove the black metal frame. (Refer to Figure 1.)

2. Pop the snap-on tabs on the modules into the openings on the MP1. When the snap-on tabs are completely pushed in, they will lock into place. (Refer to Figure 2.)

Mounting the MP1

1. Mount the MP1 in a standard enclosure. The MP1 requires one standard full footprint and mounts in any OPTION module position using #6 screws.

2. Wire modules per the appropriate installation sheets.

(Refer to Figure 3.)

DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE INSTALLINGOR REMOVING THE MP1

The MP1 mounting plate allows for the installation of Signature Series modules. Any combination of four (4) CC1, CC2, or UM large modules or eight (8) CT1, CT2 CR, MM1, or WTM small modules can be mounted on the MP1.

The MP1 is a flat aluminum plate that mounts in any standard full footprint OPTION module position in standard enclosures. The mounting plate removes the need for gang boxes and provides the ease of mounting needed equipment in a common enclosure.

Size: 9.25 in x 6.25 in (L x W)

Material: 1/8 in aluminum

Weight: .6 lb. (.27kg)

Mounting: 1 standard module footprint

Module Spaces Available:

Large 4

Small 8

PRODUCT INFORMATION

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

SPECIFICATIONS

DATE: 11FEB00

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 2.0






SIGA-MP1Mounting Plate

Figure 3, Mounting MP1 to Enclosure Backplate

ENCLOSURE BACKPLATE

MP1WITH MODULES

48 37 26

10

15

9

TB1

TB3

48 37 26

10

15

9

TB1

TB3

48 37 26

10

15

9

TB1

TB3

48 37 26

10

15

9

TB1

TB3#6 Screws

Standoffs

MP1

MODULE

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2, Mounting Module to MP1

P/N: 387160 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

Figure 1

MODULE

La plaque de montage MP1 permet l'installation de modules de la série Signature. Toute combinaison de quatre (4) modules (large) CC1, CC2, UM ou de huit (8) modules (petit) CT1, CT2, CR, MM1 ou WTM peut être installés sur la plaque MP1.

Le plaque de montage MP1 est en aluminium mince qui se monte dans un espace complet standard pour les modules optionnels dans nos boîtiers de contrôle standard. La plaque de montage élimine le besoin d'ajouter des boîtiers électriques externes et facilite le montage d'équipement dans nos boîtiers communs.

DATE: 11FEB00



AVERTISSEMENTS

COUPER LA TENSION AVANT D’INSTALLEROU D’ENLEVER LA MP1


Montage des modules sur la MP1

1. Le cadre du montage en métal noir qui est standard avec tous les modules DOIT être enlevé. Presser sur les onglets encliquetables qui se pro-longent vers l’avant depuis l’arrière des modules et enlever le cadre en métal noir. (Se référer à la figure 1.)

2. Passer les onglets encliquetables sur les modules dans les ouvertures sur la MP1. Lorsque les onglets encliquetables sont complètement enfoncés, ils se bloquent à leur place. (Se référer à la figure 2.)

Montage de la MP1

1. Monter la MP1 dans une enceinte standard. La MP1 requiert un encombrement plein standard et se monte dans n’importe quelle position de module OPTIONNEL en utilisant des vis n⁰ 6. (Se référer à la figure 3.)

2. Câblez les modules selon les fiches d’installation appropriées.


Dimensions: 23,495 cm x 15,875 cm (9,25 po x 6,25 po) (L x l)

Matériau: Aluminium 3,175 mm (1/8 po)

Poids: 0,27 kg (0,6 livre)

Montage: 1 encombrement de module standard

Espaces de module disponibles:

Grand 4

Petit 8

SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT


SIGA-MP1Plaque de montage

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : 387160 NOM DU FICHIER : 387160.CDR


CRÉÉ PAR : S. Hawes


ONGLETSENCLIQUETABLES

CADRE DEMÉTAL NOIR

P/N: 387160 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

INSTALLATION MÉCANIQUE

Figure 2, Montage d’un module sur la MP1

MP1

MODULE

Figure 3, Montage de la MP1 à la plaque arrière de l'enceinte

PLAQUE ARRIÈRE DE L'ENCEINTE

MP1WITH MODULES

48 37 26

10

15

9

TB1

TB3

48 37 26

10

15

9

TB1

TB3

48 37 26

10

15

9

TB1

TB3

48 37 26

10

15

9

TB1

TB3#6 Screws

Entretoises

Figure 1

MODULE SNAP-ONTABS

BLACK METALFRAME

WARNINGS

Mounting modules to the MP2

1. The black metal mounting frame that comes standard with all modules MUST be removed. Squeeze the snap-on tabs that extend from the back of the modules and remove the black metal frame. (Refer to Figure 1.)

2. Pop the snap-on tabs on the modules into the openings on the MP2. When the snap-on tabs are completely pushed in, they will lock into place. (Refer to Figure 2.)

Mounting the MP2

1. Mount the MP2 in a standard enclosure. The MP2 requires one ½ standard module footprint. The appropriate positions are located on the inside, left/right side of the enclosure.

2. Snap the MP2 onto the two (2) stand-offs located on the left or right side of the enclosure. Either side is adequate, depending on the enclosure setup. (Refer to Figure 3.)


DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE INSTALLINGOR REMOVING THE MP2

The MP2 mounting plate allows for the installation of Signature Series modules. Any combination of two (2) CC1, CC2, or UM large modules or four (4) CT1, CT2 CR, MM1, or WTM small modules can be mounted on the MP2.

The MP2 is a flat aluminum plate that mounts in any standard ½ footprint OPTION module position on the inside, left or right side of a standard enclosure. The mounting plate removes the need for gang boxes and provides the ease of mounting needed equipment in a common enclosure.

Size: 8.25 in x 2.75 in (L x W)



Mounting: ½ standard module footprint


Large 2

Small 4

PRODUCT INFORMATION

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

SPECIFICATIONS

DATE: 11FEB00

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 2.0






SIGA-MP2Mounting Plate

MP2

MODULE


Figure 2, Mounting Module to MP2

Figure 3, Mounting MP2 to EnclosureStandard ½ Footprint Module Space

MP2Mounting Plate

Modules

Standard½ Footprint

Module Space


Module Space

Standoffs

Standoffs

TYPICAL ENCLOSURE

P/N: 387161 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

Figure 1

MODULE

La plaque de montage MP2 permet l'installation de modules de la série Signature. Toute combinaison de deux (2) modules (large) CC1, CC2, UM ou de quatre (4) modules (petit) CT1, CT2, CR, MM1 ou WTM peut être installés sur la plaque MP2.

La plaque de montage MP2 est en aluminium mince qui se monte dans un demi-espace standard pour les modules optionnels, du côté gauche ou droit dans nos boîtiers de contrôle standard. La plaque de montage élimine le besoin d'ajouter des boîtiers électriques externes et facilite le montage d'équipement dans nos boîtiers communs.

DATE: 11FEB00



AVERTISSEMENTS

COUPER LA TENSION AVANT D’INSTALLER OU D’ENLEVER LA MP2


Montage des modules sur la MP2

1. Le cadre du montage en métal noir qui est standard avec tous les modules DOIT être enlevé. Presser sur les onglets encliquetables qui se pro-longent vers l’avant depuis l’arrière des modules et enlever le cadre en métal noir. (Se référer à la figure 1.)

2. Passer les onglets encliquetables sur les modules dans les ouvertures sur la MP2. Lorsque les onglets encliquetables sont complètement enfoncés, ils se bloquent à leur place. (Se référer à la figure 2.)

Montage de la MP2

1. Monter la MP2 dans une enceinte standard. La MP2 requiert un demi encombrement de module standard et se monte dans n’importe quelle position de module OPTIONNEL. Les positions appropriées sont situées à l’intérieur, du côté gauche/droit de l’enceinte.

2. Mettre la MP2 sur les deux (2) entretoises situées à l’intérieur du côté gauche ou du côté droit de l’enceinte. L’un ou l’autre convient, le choix dépend de la configuration de l’enceinte. (Se référer à la figure 3.)






Montage: ½ encombrement de module standard


Grand 2

Petit 4

SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT


SIGA-MP2Plaque de montage






CADRE DEMÉTAL NOIR

MP2

MODULE

P/N: 387161 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

Plaque de montageMP2

Modules

Espace moduled’1/2 encombrement

standard


standard

Entretoises

Entretoises

ENCEINTE TYPIQUE


Figure 2, Montage d’un module sur la MP2

Figure 3, Montage de la MP2 à l’enceinteEspace module égal à ½ encombrement standard

Figure 1

MODULE SNAP-ONTABS

BLACK METALFRAME

WARNINGS

Mounting modules to the MP2L

Mounting the MP2L

1. The black metal mounting frame that comes standard with allmodules MUST be removed. Squeeze the snap-on tabs thatextend from the back of the modules and remove the blackmetal frame. (Refer to Figure 1.)

2. Pop the snap-on tabs on the modules into the openings on theMP2L. When the snap-on tabs are completely pushed in, theywill lock into place. (Refer to Figure 2.)

1. Mount the MP2L in a standard enclosure. The MP2L requiresone ½ standard module footprint and mounts in any OPTIONmodule position. The appropriate positions are located on theinside, left/right side of the enclosure.

2. Snap the MP2L onto the two (2) stand-offs located on the left orright side of the enclosure. Either side is adequate, dependingon the enclosure setup. (Refer to Figure 3.)


DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE INSTALLINGOR REMOVING THE MP2L

The MP2L mounting plate allows for the installation of SignatureSeries modules. Any combination of three (3) CC1, CC2, or UM largemodules or six (6) CT1, CT2 CR, MM1, or WTM small modules canbe mounted on the MP2L.

The MP2L is a flat aluminum plate that mounts in any standard ½footprint OPTION module position on the inside, left or right side of astandard enclosure. The mounting plate removes the need for gangboxes and provides the ease of mounting needed equipment in acommon enclosure.

Size: 11.8 in x 2.75 in (L x W)



Mounting: ½ standard module footprint


Large 3

Small 6

PRODUCT INFORMATION

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

SPECIFICATIONS

DATE: 11FEB00

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 2.0






SIGA-MP2LMounting Plate


Figure 2, Mounting Module to MP2L

Figure 3, Mounting MP2L to EnclosureStandard ½ Footprint Module Space

MP2L

MODULE

MP2LMounting Plate

Modules


Module Space


Module Space

Standoffs

Standoffs

TYPICAL ENCLOSURE

P/N: 387162 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

Figure 1

MODULE

DATE: 11FEB00



AVERTISSEMENTS

COUPER LA TENSION AVANT D’INSTALLEROU D’ENLEVER LA MP2L


Montage des modules sur la MP2L

Montage de la MP2L

1. Le cadre du montage en métal noir qui est standard avec tousles modules DOIT être enlevé. Presser sur les ongletsencliquetables qui se pro-longent vers l’avant depuis l’arrièredes modules et enlever le cadre en métal noir. (Se référer à lafigure 1.)

2. Passer les onglets encliquetables sur les modules dans lesouvertures sur la MP2L. Lorsque les onglets encliquetables sontcomplètement enfoncés, ils se bloquent à leur place. (Se référerà la figure 2.)

1. Monter la MP2L dans une enceinte standard. La MP2L requiertun demi encombrement de module standard et se monte dansn’importe quelle position de module OPTIONNEL. Les positionsappropriées sont situées à l’intérieur, du côté gauche/droit del’enceinte.

2. Mettre la MP2L sur les deux (2) entretoises situées à l’intérieurdu côté gauche ou du côté droit de l’enceinte. L’un ou l’autreconvient, le choix dépend de la configuration de l’enceinte. (Seréférer à la figure 3.)






Montage: 1/2 encombrement de module standard


Grand 3

Petit 6

SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT


SIGA-MP2LPlaque de montage






CADRE DEMÉTAL NOIR

La plaque de montage MP2L permet l'installation de modules de lasérie Signature. Toute combinaison de (3) modules (large) CC1,CC2, UM ou de (6) modules (petit) CT1, CT2, CR, MM1 ou WTMpeut être installés sur la plaque MP2L.

La plaque demontage élimine le besoin d'ajouter des boîtiers électriques externeset facilite le montage d'équipement dans nos boîtiers communs.

La plaque de montage MP2L est en aluminium mince qui se montedans un demi-espace standard pour les modules optionnels, du côtégauche ou droit dans nos boîtiers de contrôle standard.

troissix

MP2L

MODULE

P/N: 387162 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

Plaque de montageMP2L

Modules


standard


standard

Entretoises

Entretoises

ENCEINTE TYPIQUE


Figure 2, Montage d’un module sur la MP2L

Figure 3, Montage de la MP2L à l’enceinteEspace module égal à ½ encombrement standard

Installation Sheet 12JUN02 P/N: 387354 REV: 2.0SIGA-MRM1 - Riser Monitor Module 1 / 2

SIGA-MRM1Riser Monitor Module

Product description

The Riser Monitor Module is an intelligent analog-addressablecomponent of Signature Series. The Riser Monitor Modulerequires one module address and monitors the integrity of:

• 12 and 24 Vdc circuits• 25 Vac circuits• 70 Vac circuits• Telephone riser signals

Upon the loss of a signal, the fire alarm control panel indicatesan alert status.

Personality codes downloaded to the Riser Monitor Moduleduring system configuration determine its function. TheSignature loop controller automatically assigns an address tothe Riser Monitor Module, but it will accept custom addressassignments from a laptop computer.

SpecificationsOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcMaximum input voltages

Riser monitor: 12 Vdc + 15%, 24 Vdc + 10%,25 Vac + 15%, 70 Vac + 15%Telephone: 3.75 to 28 Vdc

CurrentStandby: 200 AActivated: 200 A

Input currents12 Vdc: 10 mA DC24 Vdc: 10 mA DC25 Vac: 10 mA RMS70 Vac: 10 mA RMSTelephone 24 Vdc: 20 mA DC

Riser loading70 Vac: Impedance > 11 k25 Vac: Impedance > 1 k24 Vdc: Resistance > 2.4 k12 Vdc: Resistance > 1.2 kTelephone: Resistance > 1.2 k, Impedance > 1.2 k

Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Construction: High impact engineering polymerMounting: Signature Series motherboardShipping weight: 0.22 lb (0.10 kg)

Warnings• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing


• This module will not operate without electrical power. Asfires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest youdiscuss further safeguards with your local fire protectionspecialist.

• This module does not support conventional smokedetectors.


Signature Series modules require personality codes,downloaded from the Signature loop controller, to determinetheir operational features. The Riser Monitor Module iscompatible with personality codes 23 and 24, which aredescribed below.

Personality code 23: Riser monitor (factory default)

Personality code 23 configures the Riser Monitor Module tomonitor 70 Vac audio, 25 Vac audio, or 12 Vdc and 24 Vdcrisers. A trouble condition is reported back to the panelwherever the voltage on the riser drops below the troublethreshold.

Note: The hardware jumper on the Riser Monitor Module mustbe configured for either 70 Vac or 25 Vac / 24 Vdc / 12 Vdc.

Personality code 24: Telephone riser monitor

Personality code 24 configures the Riser Monitor Module tomonitor telephone risers. A trouble condition is reported backto the panel whenever voltage on the riser drops below thetrouble threshold.

The delay time from when the device falls below the troublethreshold to when it sends a trouble signal to the panel is userdefinable in the appropriate data entry program. A delay of 5 to75 seconds can be assigned to the device; the default delayperiod is 15 seconds.



Note: The factory ships the Riser Monitor Module as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.

To install the Riser Monitor Module:

1. Install the Signature motherboard (UIO2R, UIO6, orUIO6R). See the motherboard installation sheet for moreinformation.

2. Plug the Riser Monitor Module into any available positionon the Signature motherboard.

P/N: 387354 REV: 2.0 12JUN02 Installation Sheet2 / 2 SIGA-MRM1 - Riser Monitor Module

3. Secure the module to the motherboard with the twocaptive screws on the module.

4. Wire the module according to the instructions in the wiringdiagram.

5. Write the address assigned to the module on the label andapply it to the module.

6. Remove the bar-coded serial number label from themodule and apply it to the appropriate location in the serialnumber log book.

Jumper setupJumper Riser

12 Vdc, 24 Vdc,or 25 Vac

70 Vac Telephone

JP1 Out In Out

JP2 In Out Out

Wiring diagram

4321

4321

TB14

TB15No connections required

1 2 3 4

[4]

[5]

1 2 3 4

[3]

TB7

Green LED

Data out

Signaturedatacircuit

Data in[2]

4321

No connections required on the Riser Monitor Module. Other modules may require connections.

Riser Monitor ModuleSignature Series motherboard(UIO2R, UIO6, or UIO6R)

12 Vdc, 24 Vdc, 25 Vac, or 70 Vac riser from power supply or audio amplifier (not polarity sensitive) Telephone riser from telephone controller+

_

[1]

JP2JP1

See Jumper setup

[1]

[6]

[7]

Notes

[1] Supervised and power-limited.


[3] Supervised and power-limited unless connected to anonpower-limited source. If the source is nonpower-limited, eliminate the power-limited mark and:

• Maintain a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) space from power-limitedwiring.

or


[4] The UIO6R and the UIO2R do not come with TB14.

[5] The UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13.

[6] Active when communicating with the Signature loopcontroller.

[7] You cannot use the telephone riser while you use the 12and 24 Vdc, 25 Vac, or 70 Vac riser.

[8] See the UIO2R or UIO6(R) installation sheet for additionalinstructions about the separation of power-limited andnonpower-limited wiring.

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387015P REV: 8.0 SIGA-PHS - Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector 1 / 2

SIGA-PHS Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector

Product description


(located on base)


Description: The Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector (SIGA-PHS) is part of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device contains a photoelectric smoke sensor and a fixed-temperature heat sensor. The detector analyzes the data from both sensing devices and determines whether an alarm should be initiated.

The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity and notifies the loop controller of its condition. It issues a dirty-sensor warning when it reaches a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for service while the detector still operates within UL/ULC limits.

LEDs: The SIGA-PHS has two LEDs that show its status.

• Normal: Green LED flashes • Alarm/active: Red LED flashes • Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously



Self-Diagnostics: The SIGA-PHS contains a microprocessor capable of performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired.

Specifications Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Normal operating current: 45 µA Alarm current: 45 µA Standalone alarm current: 18 mA Air velocity: 0 to 5,000 ft/min (0 to 25.39 m/s) ULI/ULC smoke sensitivity range: 0.67 to 3.77% obsc/ft (305 mm) ULI fixed-temp. alarm rating: 135 °F (57 °C) ULC fixed-temp. alarm rating: 140 °F (60 °C) Actual alarm point: 130 to 140 °F (54 to 60 °C) Operating environment


Environmental compensation: Automatic Compatible bases Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mounted): 12 in (305 mm) Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g) Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)




3. Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of sensing capabilities, and are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. The heat sensor in this device provides a source of supplemental information to that provided by the photoelectric smoke sensor. The heat sensor by itself does not provide life safety protection.
















P/N: 387015P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet 2 / 2 SIGA-PHS - Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector

SIGA-PHS Détecteur 3D multicapteurs intelligent





Description: Le détecteur de fumée 3D multicapteurs intelligent (SIGA-PHS) est l’un des composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent comprend à la fois un capteur photoélectrique de fumée et un capteur thermique à température fixe pour la détection des incendies. Le capteur de fumée photoélectrique utilise une chambre de détection à captage optique. Le capteur thermique à température fixe contrôle la température de l’air environnant. Le détecteur analyse les données des deux capteurs et détermine ainsi si une alarme doit être déclenchée.

Le détecteur contrôle constamment toute modification de sensibilité due à l'environnement (en raison de poussières, de fumées, de changements de température ou d'humidité) et informe le contrôleur de boucle de la situation. Une alarme de capteur sale est émise par le détecteur lorsque l'encrassement du capteur a atteint une certaine limite. Ceci informe l'opérateur de la nécessité d'un nettoyage alors que le détecteur est encore capable de fonctionner dans les limites UL/ULC.

Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-PHS comprend deux témoins à DEL: • Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote • Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote • Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins allumés de façon continue



Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-PHS contient un microprocesseur capable d'effectuer une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser les résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, la dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment.

Caractéristiques techniques Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à19,95 Vcc Courant de veille: 45 µA Courant d'alarme: 45 µA Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA Vitesses de l air: 0 à 25,39 m/sec (0 à 5.000 pi/min) Seuil de sensibilité à la fumée ULI/ULC: 0,67 à 3,77% obsc/pi (305 mm) Seuil de température fixe ULI: 57 ºC (135 ºF) Seuil de température fixe ULC: 60 ºC (140 ºF) Point d alarme réel: 54 à 60 ºC (130 à 140 ºF) Environnement de fonctionnement


Compensation/environnement: Automatique Bases compatibles Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Distance max. du plafond (montage mural): 305 mm (12 po) Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz) Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)




3. Les détecteurs photoélectriques peuvent détecter de nombreux types de feux et offrent une excellente détection des feux couvants à développement lent. Le capteur thermique de ce dispositif est prévu pour fournir des renseignements supplémentaires à ceux du cap-teur de fumée. Le capteur thermique tout seul n’assure pas la pro-tection de vies humaines.

4. Un entretien (régulier ou particulier) est nécessaire pour assurer le bon fonctionnement du système. Cet entretien doit être planifié con-formément aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Se référer aux normes NFPA 72 et CAN/ULC 536.

5. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service du détecteur. Ce couvercle n'est pas suffisant pour protéger le détecteur lors de travaux de construction ou de réamé-nagement.






d'accès du mécanisme de vérouillage tout en tour-nant le détecteur dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. Note: Le mécanisme de verrouillage peut être mis définitive-ment hors service en cassant et en enlevant le levier en plastique de la base.

2. Se référer à la brochure technique pour les instruc-tions d'installation.




6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le Série Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de sensibilité.



PRODUCT INFORMATION

INSTALLATION SHEET

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

DATE: 28APR99

SHEET P/N: P-047550-1899 FILE: P-047550-1899.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0



WARNINGS


Description: The Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector (PHSI) is part of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device contains a photoelectric smoke sensor and a fixed-temperature heat sensor. The detector analyzes the data from both sensing devices and determines whether an alarm should be initiated.

The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity and notifies the loop controller of its condition. It issues a dirty-sensor warning when it reaches a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for service while the detector still operates.

LEDs: The PHSI has two LEDs that show its status.

Normal: Green LED flashesAlarm/active: Red LED flashesStandalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously



Self-Diagnostics: The PHSI contains a microprocessor capable of performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in non-volatile memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired.

1) Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot while rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the detector. Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.








2) This detector will NOT sense fires in areas where smoke cannot reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.

3) Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of sensing capabilities, and are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. The heat sensor in this device provides a source of supplemental information to that provided by the photoelectric smoke sensor. The heat sensor by itself does NOT provide life safety protection.



6) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room

temperature before applying power.


GS Building Systems CorporationNorth Main StreetPittsfield, ME 04967-1500

See the Technical Bulletin for cleaning instructions.


SPECIFICATIONS

Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 VdcNormal operating current: 45 µAAlarm current: 45 µAStandalone alarm current: 18 mAActual alarm point: 130 to 140 °F (54 to 60 °C)Air velocity range: 0 to 5000 ft/min (0 to 25.39 m/s)Operating temperature range: 32 to 100 °F (0 to 38 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH, non-condensingStorage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Environmental compensation: AutomaticConstruction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, whiteCompatible bases


Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mounted): 12 in (305 mm)


(Located on Base)


SIGA-PHSIIntelligent 3D Multisensor

Smoke Detector




TM

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387014P REV: 8.0 SIGA-PS - Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector 1 / 2

SIGA-PS Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector

Product description


(located on base)


Description: The Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector (SIGA-PS) is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device uses an optical sensing chamber to detect smoke. The detector analyzes the sensor data to determine when an alarm is initiated.

The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity due to the environment (e.g. dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity) and notifies the loop controller of its condition. The SIGA-PS issues a dirty sensor warning when it reaches its preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for service while the detector is still operating within UL/ULC limits.

LEDs: The SIGA-PS provides two LEDs that show its status:

• Normal: green LED flashes • Alarm/active: red LED flashes • Standalone alarm: both LEDs glow continuously


Standalone operation: If unable to communicate with the loop controller, the detector alarms when smoke levels exceed its preset value. Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manual for verification of standalone capabilities.

Self-diagnostics: The SIGA-PS contains a microprocessor capable of performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in non-volatile memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired.

Specifications Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc Normal operating current: 45 µA Alarm current: 45 µA Standalone alarm current: 18 mA Air velocity: 0 to 5,000 ft/min (0 to 25.39 m/s) ULI/ULC smoke sensitivity range: 0.67 to 3.77% obsc/ft (305 mm) Operating environment


Environmental compensation: Automatic Compatible bases Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Maximum distance from ceiling wall-mounted: 12 in (305 mm) Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g) Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)




3. Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of sensing capabilities, but are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires.





Refer to Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for additional information and cleaning instructions.











P/N: 387014P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet 2 / 2 SIGA-PS - Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector

SIGA-PS Détecteur photoélectrique de fumée intelligent





Description: Le détecteur photoélectrique de fumée (SIGA-PS) est l’un des composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent utilise une chambre de détection optique pour détecter la présence de fumée. Le capteur recueille des données sur son environnement, puis le détecteur analyse ces informations et détermine ainsi si une alarme doit être déclenchée.

Le détecteur contrôle constamment toute modification de sensibilité due à l'environnement (en raison de poussières, de fumées, de changements de température ou d'humidité) et informe le contrôleur de boucle de la situation. Une alarme de capteur sale est émise par le détecteur lorsque l'encrassement du capteur a atteint une certaine limite. Ceci informe l'opérateur du système de la nécessité d'un nettoyage alors que le détecteur est encore capable de fonctionner dans les limites UL/ULC.

Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-PS comprend deux témoins à DEL indiquant l'état.

• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote • Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote • Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins sont allumés de façon continue



Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-PS contient un microprocesseur capable d'effectuer une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser les résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, la dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment.

Caractéristiques techniques Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à19,95 Vcc Courant de veille: 45 µA Courant d'alarme: 45 µA Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA Vitesses de l’air: 0 à 25,39 m/s (0 à 5.000 pi/min) Seuil de sensibilité à la fumée ULI/ULC: 0,67 à 3,77% obsc/pi (305 mm) Environnement de fonctionnement


Compensation/environnement: Automatique Bases compatibles Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Distance max. du plafond (montage mural): 305 mm (12 po) Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz) ttempérature de stockage: 20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)




3. Les détecteurs photoélectriques peuvent détecter de nombreux types de feux et offrent une excellente détection des feux couvants à développement lent.


5. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est pas suffisant pour protéger le détecteur lors de travaux de construction ou de réaménagement.







2. Se référer à la Brochure Technique pour les instructions d'installation.




6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le système Série Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de sensibilité.



PRODUCT DIAGRAM

PRODUCT INFORMATION

Description: The Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector (PSI) is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device uses an optical sensing chamber to detect smoke. The detector analyzes the sensor data to determine when an alarm is initiated.

The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity due to the environment (e.g. dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity) and notifies the loop controller of its condition. The PSI issues a dirty sensor warning when it reaches its preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for service while the detector is still operating.

LEDs: The PSI provides two LEDs that show its status.Normal: green LED flashesAlarm/active: red LED flashesStandalone alarm: both LEDs glow continuously


Standalone operation: If unable to communicate with the loop controller, the detector alarms when smoke levels exceed its preset value. Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manual for verification of standalone capabilities.

Self-diagnostics: The PSI contains a microprocessor capable of performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in non-volatile memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired.


1) Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot while rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the detector. Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.







2) This detector will NOT sense fires in areas where smoke cannot reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.

3) Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of sensing capabilities, but are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires.


5) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room temperature before applying power.




Refer to the Technical Bulletin for additional information and cleaning instructions.


WARNINGS


(Located on Base)


Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcNormal operating current: 45 µAAlarm current: 45 µAStandalone alarm current: 18 mAAir velocity range: 0 to 5000 ft/min (0 to 25.39 m/s)Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH, non-condensingStorage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Environmental compensation: AutomaticConstruction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, whiteCompatible bases


Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)Maximum distance from ceiling wall-mounted: 12 in. (305 mm)

SPECIFICATIONS

DATE: 04JUN99

INSTALLATION SHEET

SHEET P/N: P-047550-1900

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0


SIGA-PSIIntelligent Photoelectric

Smoke Detector

FILE: P-047550-1900.CDR






TM

SPECIFICATIONS

SIGA-RB

WIRING DIAGRAMS






Shipping Weight

SIGA-RB 3.2 oz (91 g)



North American 1-Gang Box

3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box

4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box

European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing Centers

BESA Box

NOTES:

1) These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, 18 AWG (2.05 sq mm, 1.5 sq mm, 1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.



Term

1

Normally-Closed

45

DATA IN (-)Not Used

7 DATA OUT (-)

CONTACT RATING1.0 Amp @ 30 VDC

(Pilot Duty)

2 DATA IN/OUT (+)3 Common

6

Normally-Open

Description

DATA OUT (-)

DATA OUT (+)To Next DeviceFrom Signature Controller

or Previous Device

DATA IN (-)

DATA IN (+)

56

34

17

2

CommonNormally-

OpenNormally-

Closed

Relay Detector Base, SIGA-RB

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0


SIGA-RBDetector Base

DATE: 01/18/99






7 99 3 0 1 6 0 1 9 7 6

P/N: P-047550-1886 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 4


MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

1.1 in(27 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)


4.4 in (112 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.75 in(45 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

3-1/2 in or 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box 60.3 mm Fixing Centers


Control Panel

3

1.

2


2

Relay Detector Base


2

56

34

17

2


3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2



+

_

S

+

_

S






DATE: 01/18/99


FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF.: P-047550-1886


NOM DU FICHIER: P-047550-1886.CDR



Bases De DétecteurSIGA-RB

SIGA-RB

Gamme de températures de fonctionnement 0 à 49 ºC (32 à 120 ºF)


Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

Construction et fini Polymère technique avecrésistance élevée aux impacts, blanc



SIGA-RB 91 g (3,2 oz)


Boîtes électriques compatiblesBoîte simple standard Amérique du NordBoîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeurBoîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeurBoîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de 60,3 mmBoîte BESA

NOTES:

2 2 2 21) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75 mm(AWG nº 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.



DIAGRAMMES DE CÂBLAGE CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

P/N: P-047550-1886 REV: 1.0 Page 3 of 4

56

34

17

2







Masse

Normale-mentfermé

Normale-ment

ouvert

AMPÉRAGE DESCONTACTS

1.0 Amp @ 30 V CC(fonction de commande)

Borne Description1 Normalement

ouvert2 Entrée/Sortie

des données (+)3 Masse4 Entrée des

données (-)5 Inutilisée6 Normalement

fermée7 Sortie des

données (-)

Base de détecteur à relais SIGA-RB

P/N: P-047550-1886 REV: 1.0 Page 4 of 4

27 mm(1,1 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm(1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm(1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

45 mm (1,75 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

Boîte BESA




SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE





Panneau de commande


3

1.

2

2 2

56

34

17

2

3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2


+

_

S

+

_

S




bornes.

Operating Temperature Range +32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)





Shipping Weight

SIGA-RB4 3.2 oz (91 g)





brackets on base)

NOTES:

1) These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, 18 AWG (2.05 sq mm, 1.5 sq mm, 1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.



SIGA-RB4

Relay Detector Base, SIGA-RB4


CONTACT RATING1.0 Amp @ 30 VDC

(Pilot Duty)


DATA OUT (-)

DATA OUT (+)To Next Device

DATA IN (-)

DATA IN (+)

56

34

17

2

CommonNormally-

OpenNormally-

Closed

Normally-Closed

DATA IN (-)Not Used

DATA OUT (-)

DATA IN/OUT (+)Common

Normally-Open

DescriptionTerm

1

45

7

23

6

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0


SIGA-RB4Detector Base

DATE: 01/18/99






7 09 3 0 1 6 0 1 9 7 9

P/N: P-047550-1888 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 4


MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Flush Mount)

4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Surface Mount) 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring


1) A 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring (SIGA-TS) must be installed to give a "finished" appearance to the 4 in base.


NOTES:

SIGA-TS


Control Panel

3

1.

2




2

Relay Detector Base


2

56

34

17

2


3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2



+

_

S

+

_

S










SIGA-RB4 91 g (3,2 oz)


Pièces apparentées Jupe de garniture de boîteélectrique de 10,16 cm (4 po) réf. P-025031-0039



NOTES:

2 2 2 2 1) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75 mm(AWG n 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.



° °

° °

°

SIGA-RB4


DATE : 01/18/99


FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : P-047550-1888 NOM DU FICHIER : P-047550-1888.CDR




Base de détecteurSIGA-RB4


Base de détecteur à relais, SIGA-RB4

AMPÉRAGE DESCONTACTS

1.0 Amp à 30 V CC(fonction de commande)

Borne Description1 Normalement

ouvert2 Entrée/Sortie

des données (+)3 Masse4 Entrée des

données (-)5 Inutilisée6 Normalement

fermée7 Sortie des

P/N: P-047550-1888 REV: 1.0 Page 3 of 4

56

34

17

2

Entrée des

Du contrôleur de boucle Signature

Entrée des

Sortie des

Normale-ment

Normale-ment

P/N: P-047550-1888 REV: 1.0 Page 4 of 4




Panneau de commande


112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm(1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm(0,8 po)


38 mm(1,5 po)

112 mm (4,4)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm(0,8 po)



SIGA-TS


2) Se référer à la fiche d’installation réf. 387056P pour des renseignements supplémentaires.

NOTES:



SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE

3

1.

2

2 2

56

34

17

2

3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2


+

_

S

+

_

S




bornes.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387347 REV: 3.0SIGA-RM1 - Riser Monitor Module 1 / 3

SIGA-RM1Riser Monitor Module

Product description

The SIGA-RM1 Riser Monitor Module is an intelligent analog-addressable component of Signature Series. The SIGA-RM1requires one module address and monitors the integrity of:

• 12 and 24 Vdc circuits• 25 Vac circuits• 70 Vac circuits• Telephone riser signals

Upon the loss of a signal, the fire alarm control panel indicatesan alert status.

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-RM1automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to themodule via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.

Mounting

The SIGA-RM1 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in(64 mm) deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2in (38 mm) deep with 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.


The SIGA-RM1 requires the Signature loop controller. The loopcontroller downloads the personality code which determineshow the module operates. The following personality codes canbe downloaded to the SIGA-RM1.

Personality code 23: Riser monitor (factory default):Personality code 23 configures the SIGA-RM1 to monitor 70Vac audio, 25 Vac audio, or 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc risers. Atrouble condition is reported back to the panel wherever thevoltage on the riser drops below the trouble threshold.

Note: The hardware jumper on the SIGA-RM1 must beconfigured for either 70 Vac or 25 Vac / 24 Vdc / 12 Vdc.

Personality code 24: Telephone riser monitor: Personalitycode 24 configures the SIGA-RM1 to monitor telephone risers.A trouble condition is reported back to the panel whenevervoltage on the riser drops below the trouble threshold.

The delay time from when the device falls below the troublethreshold to when it sends a trouble signal to the panel is userdefinable in the appropriate data entry program. A delay of 5 to75 seconds can be assigned to the device; the default delayperiod is 15 seconds.





SpecificationsOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcMaximum input voltages

Riser monitor: 12 Vdc + 15%, 24 Vdc + 10%,25 Vac + 15%, 70 Vac + 15%Telephone: 3.75 to 28 Vdc

Standby current: 200 µAActivated current: 200 µAInput currents

12 Vdc: 10 mA DC24 Vdc: 10 mA DC25 Vac: 10 mA RMS70 Vac: 10 mA RMSTelephone 24 Vdc: 20 mA DC

Riser loading70 Vac: Impedance > 11 kΩ25 Vac: Impedance > 1 kΩ24 Vdc: Resistance > 2.4 kΩ12 Vdc: Resistance > 1.2 kΩTelephone: Resistance > 1.2 kΩ, Impedance > 1.2 kΩ

Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Construction: High impact engineering polymerShipping weight: 0.48 lb (0.21 kg)Compatible electrical boxes

North American 2.5-inch (64 mm) deep 2-gang boxStandard 4-inch (101.6 mm) x 1.5-inch (38 mm) deepsquare box with 2-gang cover

P/N: 387347 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 3 SIGA-RM1 - Riser Monitor Module

Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-RM1 is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.







Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70 National ElectricalCode.


1/4 in (~6 mm)



Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387347 REV: 3.0SIGA-RM1 - Riser Monitor Module 3 / 3

Wiring diagram

12345678

Data out (-)

Data out (+)

Data in (-)

Data in (+)From Signature loop controlleror previous device

To Signature device12 Vdc, 24 Vdc, 25 Vac, or 70 Vac riser from power supply or audio amplifier (not polarity sensitive)

Telephone riser (+)

Telephone riser (-)

12 Vdc, 24 Vdc, or 25 Vac

70 Vac

JP1

Jumper settings

Note: Leave the jumper out for telephone riser operation.

[2] [3][4]

Green LED

[1] [2]

[5]

[6]

Notes


[2] 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) max; 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) min

[3] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet forwiring specifications

[4] Supervised and power-limited unless connected to anonpower-limited source. If the source is nonpower-limited, eliminate the power-limited mark and:

• Maintain a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) space from power-limited wiring

or

• Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable inaccordance with NFPA 70 National Electric Code

[5] Active when communicating with the Signature loopcontroller

[6] You cannot use the telephone riser while you use the 12and 24 Vdc, 25 Vac, or 70 Vac riser

SPECIFICATIONS

SIGA-SB

WIRING DIAGRAMS

56

34

17

2

DATA OUT (-)


or Previous Device

DATA IN (-)

DATA IN (+)

Remote LED(SIGA-LED) Maximum

Resistanceper Wire

Must NOTExceed 10Ω- +

Standard Detector Base, SIGA-SB

Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)


Storage Temperature Range -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C)



Shipping Weight

SIGA-SB 2.9 oz (82 g)


Compatible Electrical BoxesNorth American 1-Gang Box3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon BoxEuropean 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing CentersBESA Box

NOTES:

1) The SIGA-SB provides wiring terminals for connection to Remote LED, Model SIGA-LED.

2) These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, and 18 AWG (2.05 sq mm, 1.5 sq mm, 1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.



Term

1 Not Used

4

45

DATA IN (-)

Remote LEDRemote LED

7 DATA OUT (-)

2 DATA IN/OUT (+)3 Not Used

6 Not Used

Description

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 8.0


SIGA-SBDetector Base

DATE: 01/18/99






7 69 3 0 1 6 0 1 9 7 7

P/N: 387019P REV: 8.0 Page 2 of 4


MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

1.1" (27 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

4.4" (112 mm)

0.8" (20 mm)

4.4" (112 mm)

1.5" (38 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

0.8" (20 mm)


4.4" (112 mm)

1.5" (38 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

0.8" (20 mm)

4.4" (112 mm)

1.75" (45 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

0.8" (20 mm)

3-1/2" or 4" by 1-1/2" (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box 60.3 mm Fixing Centers


Control Panel

3

1.

2


2

Relay Detector Base


2

56

34

17

2


3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2



+

_

S

+

_

S

Refer to compatible panelinstallation sheet





DATE: 01/18/99







Bases De DétecteurSIGA-SB

SIGA-SB

Gamme de températures de fonctionnement 0 à 49 ºC (32 à 120 ºF)


Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)




SIGA-SB 82 g (2,9 oz)


Boîtes électriques compatiblesBoîte simple standard Amérique du NordBoîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeurBoîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeurBoîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de 60,3 mmBoîte BESA

NOTES:1) Le SIGA-SB dispose de bornes de câblage pour connexion à un témoin à

DEL à distance, modèle SIGA-LED. 2 2 2 22) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75 mm

(AWG nº 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.3) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cette

dernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.4) Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils

du circuit de signalisation autour de bornes.Borne Description


des données (+)3 Inutilisée4 Entrée des

données (-)4 DEL à distance5 DEL à distance6 Inutilisée7 Sortie des

données (-)

56

34

17

2

DEL à distance(SIGA-LED)

La résistancemaximum parfil NE doit PAS

dépasser 10Ω- +








Base de détecteur standard, SIGA-SB


P/N: 387019P REV: 8.0 Page 3 of 4

P/N: 387019P REV: 8.0 Page 4 of 4

27 mm(1,1 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm(1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm(1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

45 mm (1,75 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

Boîte BESA




SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE





Panneau de commande


3

1.

2

2 2

56

34

17

2

3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2


+

_

S

+

_

S




bornes.






Shipping Weight

SIGA-SB4 2.9 oz (82 g)





brackets on base)

NOTES:

1) The SIGA-SB4 provides wiring terminals for connection to Remote LED, Model SIGA-LED.




SIGA-SB4

Standard Detector Base, SIGA-SB4


56

34

17

2

DATA OUT (-)


or Previous Device

DATA IN (-)

DATA IN (+)

Remote LED(SIGA-LED) Maximum

Resistanceper Wire

Must NOTExceed 10Ω- +

Term

1 Not Used

4

45

DATA IN (-)

Remote LEDRemote LED

7 DATA OUT (-)

2 DATA IN/OUT (+)3 Not Used

6 Not Used

Description

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 7.0


SIGA-SB4Detector Base

DATE: 01/18/99






7 69 3 0 1 6 0 1 9 8 0

P/N: 387034P REV: 7.0 Page 2 of 4


MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

4.4" (112 mm)

1.5" (38 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

0.8" (20 mm)

1.5" (38 mm)

4.4" (112 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

0.8" (20 mm)

4" by 1-1/2" (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Flush Mount)

4" by 1-1/2" (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Surface Mount) 4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring


1) A 4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring (SIGA-TS) must be installed to give a "finished" appearance to the 4" base.


NOTES:

SIGA-TS


Control Panel

3

1.

2


2

Relay Detector Base


2

56

34

17

2


3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2



+

_

S

+

_

S

Refer to compatible panelinstallation sheet











SIGA-SB4 82 g (2,9 oz)


Pièces apparentées Jupe de garniture de boîteélectrique de 10,16 cm (4 po) (réf. SIGA-TS)



NOTES:

1) Le SIGA-SB4 dispose de bornes de câblage pour connexion à un témoin à DEL à distance, modèle SIGA-LED.

2 2 2 2 2) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75 mm(AWG n 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.



° °

° °

°

SIGA-SB4


DATE : 01/18/99


FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : 387034P NOM DU FICHIER : 387034P.CDR




Base de détecteurSIGA-SB4


Base de détecteur standard, SIGA-SB4

Borne Description1 Inutilisée2 Entrée/Sortie

des données (+)3 Inutilisée4 Entrée des

données (-)4 DEL à distance5 DEL à distance6 Inutilisée7 Sortie des

56

34

17

2

- +

DEL à distance(SIGA-LED)

La résistancemaximum parfil NE doit PAS

dépasser 10Ω



Du contrôleur de boucle Signature ou du dispositif précédent




P/N: 387034P REV: 7.0 Page 3 of 4

P/N: 387034P REV: 7.0 Page 4 of 4

112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm(1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm(0,8 po)


38 mm(1,5 po)

112 mm (4,4)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm(0,8 po)



SIGA-TS


2) Se référer à la fiche d’installation réf. 387056P pour des renseignements

NOTES:



SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE




Panneau de commande


3

1.

2

2 2

56

34

17

2

3

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2


+

_

S

+

_

S




bornes.

Installation Sheet 30OCT01 P/N: 387632 REV: 1.0SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module 1 / 4

SIGA-SEC2Security Loop Module

Product description

The Security Loop Module is an intelligent, analog-addressabledevice that interfaces one or two security loops to a Signatureloop controller. Personality codes downloaded to the moduleduring system configuration allow the user to configure eachchannel for almost any security application. This module alsosupports guard tour, per NFPA 72. The loop controllerautomatically assigns two addresses to the Security LoopModule, but it will accept custom address assignments from alaptop computer.


The Security Loop Module requires a Signature loop controllerto download the personality codes that determine how it willoperate. The personality codes described below arecompatible with the security loop module.

Personality code 3: N.O. active, nonlatching (guard tour)

Personality code 3 configures the channel 1 input for use withClass B, normally-open (N.O.) contact guard tour devices.When the N.O. contact of the device is closed, an active signalis sent to the loop controller. The active status is nonlatchingand clears when the N.O. input is returned to the opencondition. The panel will report an open circuit as a troublecondition.

Note: Configure both zones the same for personality code 3.The security loop module requires connection to a listed guardtour station.

Personality code 41: security open with tamper

Personality code 41 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.O. contact for security conditions and aClass B, normally-closed (N.C.) contact for tamper conditions.When the N.O. contact is closed, an active signal is sent to theloop controller; similarly, when the N.C. contact is opened, atamper signal is sent to the loop controller.

Personality code 42: security closed with tamper

Personality code 42 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.C. contact for security conditions and aClass B, N.O. contact for tamper conditions. When the N.C.contact is opened, an active signal is sent to the loopcontroller; similarly, when the N.O. contact is closed, a tampersignal is sent to the loop controller.

Personality code 43: basic security (factory default)

The factory assigns personality code 43 to the channel 1 input.Personality code 43 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.C. contact and/or a Class B, N.O. contactfor security conditions. When the N.C. contact is opened or theN.O. contact of the device is closed, an active signal is sent tothe loop controller.

Personality code 44: security tamper

Personality code 44 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.C. contact and/or a Class B, N.O. contactfor tamper conditions. When the N.C. contact is opened or theN.O. contact is closed, a tamper signal is sent to the loopcontroller.

Personality code 45: security open

Personality code 45 configures the channel 1 input for use witha Class B, N.O. contact. When the N.O. contact is closed, anactive signal is sent to the loop controller. The panel will reportan open circuit as a SecurityFault condition.

Personality code 46: security closed

Personality code 46 configures the channel 1 input for use witha Class B, N.C. contact. When the N.C. contact is opened, anactive signal is sent to the loop controller. The panel will reporta short circuit as a SecurityFault condition.

Personality code 48: security - maintenance

Personality code 48 configures the channel 1 input for devicesthat use a Class B, N.C. contact or a Class B, N.O. contact formaintenance conditions (e.g. a motion detector with a separatemaintenance contact). When the N.C. contact is opened or theN.O. contact is closed, a maintenance signal is sent to the loopcontroller.

Note: See the SDU Online Help (P/N 180653) for additionalprogramming instructions.

SpecificationsData input voltage: 15.20 to 19.95 VdcCurrent draw

Standby current: 720 ATamper/active current: 850 A

Security circuitEOL resistor: UL/ULC listed 47 kMax. resistance/channel: 50 (25 per wire)Max. capacitance/channel: 0.1 FMax. voltage/channel: 18 VdcMax. current/channel: 0.32 mA

Address requirement: 2Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Humidity: 0 to 93% noncondensingConstruction: High impact engineering polymerCompatible electrical boxes

North American 1-gang box: 2.5 in (64 mm) deepStandard 4-inch square box: 1.5 in (38 mm) deep with1-gang cover

P/N: 387632 REV: 1.0 30OCT01 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module

LEDsDiagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of themodule when the front cover is removed.


Normal Green LED flashes

Active/Tamper Red LED flashes

Normal

Active/Tamper

Figure 1: LED locations and indications

WARNINGS

• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removingcomponents. Failure to do so may result in serious injury orloss of life.

• This module will not operate without electrical power. As firesfrequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discussfurther safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.



Installation instructionsTo wire and label the module:

1. Open the front cover of the module to expose the circuitboard and the backbox.

2. Remove the circuit board in accordance with static-sensitive handling practices.


4. Run the wiring through the wiring entrances of thebackbox. (See Figure 2.)

5. Make the appropriate wiring connections to TB1 and TB2.(See Figure 4.)

6. Write the module address assignment on the labelprovided and apply it to the module.

7. Peel off the serial number label from the module and applyit to the appropriate location in the Serial Number LogBook.

To surface mount the module:

1. Prepare the mounting knockouts in the backbox. (SeeFigure 2.)

2. Mount the backbox on a smooth, flat surface.

3. Reinstall the circuit board.

4. Replace the front cover.

[1] Mounting knockout[2] Wiring entrance

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

Backbox (front view)

Backbox (rear view)

Side view

Front cover

Frontcover Backbox

Figure 2: Surface mounting the module

To mount the module in an electrical box:

1. Reinstall the circuit board.

2. Replace the front cover.

3. Place the security loop module inside the electrical box.

4. Secure the appropriate cover to the electrical box.

4-inch electrical box

Security Loop Module Conduit

Security input circuits

Signature data circuit

Conduit

Figure 3: Mounting the module in an electrical box


1/4 in (~6 mm)

Strip 1/4 inch (about 6 mm) from the ends of ALL wires thatconnect to the terminal block of the module.

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection

Installation Sheet 30OCT01 P/N: 387632 REV: 1.0SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module 3 / 4

Wiring diagram

Channel 2 input

Channel 1 input

Security Loop Module

[1] [2] [3] [4]TB2

8

7

6

5 _

+

+

-

TB1

1

2

3

4

_

+

_

+

From Signature loop controller or previous device

Data in (+)

Data in (-)

Data out (-)

Data out (+)

To next Signature device

Signature loop

Notes[1] The circuits connected to TB2 are configurable to

personality codes 3, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, or 48. The personality code assigned to the circuits determines the types of devices on them.

[2] Class B (Style 4)

[3] 25 resistance per wire, max.

[4] 16 AWG (1.0 sq mm) max. 22 AWG (0.25 sq mm) min.

[5] Listed 47 k EOL

[6] UL/ULC listed guard tour station

7. All wiring is supervised and power-limited


Basic security

N.C. with tamper

N.O. with tamper

Guard tour [6]

Tamper

Alarm

Alarm

Tamper

[5]

[5]

[5]

[5]

Figure 4: Wiring diagram

P/N: 387632 REV: 1.0 30OCT01 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module

PRODUCT INFORMATION

DESCRIPTIONThe 4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring, Model SIGA-TS, is a decorative cover intended for use with Signature Series 4" Bases. The trim skirt/ring covers the mounting screws on the SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-IB4 to provide a "finished" appearance to these bases.

The SIGA-TS may also be used with SIGA-SB, SIGA-RB, and SIGA-IB bases (if necessary) to provide a "finished" appearance.

1) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the base. Mount the base to the electrical box.

2) Align the tabs on the trim skirt/ring with the notches on the base.

3) Push the trim skirt/ring onto the base until it snaps into position.

4) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the detector. Install the detector in its base.


SPECIFICATIONS


Compatible Bases

Standard Base, SIGA-SB4Relay Base, SIGA-RB4Isolator Base, SIGA-IB4

Standard Base, SIGA-SBRelay Base, SIGA-RBIsolator Base, SIGA-IB, SIGI-IBS


Shipping Weight 3.9 oz (110 g)

SIGA-TS

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 7.0


SIGA-TS4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring

DATE: 01/18/99






7 39 3 0 1 6 0 1 9 8 1

P/N: REV: 7.0 Page 2 of 2387056P


DESCRIPTION

La jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po), modèle SIGA-TS, est un couvercle décoratif spécialement conçu pour les bases de 10,16 cm (4 po) de la série Signature. Elle permet de dissimuler les vis de montage des bases SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4 et SIGA-IB4 afin de leur donner un aspect final plus soigné.

Elle peut également être utilisée sur les bases SIGA-SB, SIGA-RB et SIGA-IB, si nécessaire, afin de leur donner un aspect final plus soigné.



Bases compatibles

Base standard, SIGA-SB4Base relais, SIGA-RB4Base d’isolement, SIGA-IB4

Base standard, SIGA-SBBase relais, SIGA-RBBase d’isolement, SIGA-IB, SIGI-IBS

Construction et fini Polymère technique avec résistanceélevée aux impacts, blanc

Poids à la livraison 110 g (3,9 oz)

SIGA-TSJupe de garniture de boîte

de 10,16 cm (4 pouces)


1) Se référer à la fiche d’installation fournie avec la base. Monter la base sur la boîte électrique.

2) Aligner les onglets de la jupe de garniture avec les encoches de la base.

3) Enfoncez la jupe de garniture sur la base jusqu’à ce qu’elle s’enclen-che en place.

4) Se référer à la fiche d’installation fournie avec le détecteur. Monter le détecteur sur la base.




DATE: 01/18/99







SIGA-TS

SPECIFICATIONS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

DESCRIPTION

The SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt Ring may be used with all

Signature Series bases (if necessary) to provide a

"finished" appearance around an installed base. It is

provided with all Signature Series 4" bases.


1) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the base.

Mount the base to the electrical box.

2) Align the tabs on the trim skirt/ring with the notches

on the base.

3) Push the trim skirt/ring onto the base until it snaps

into position.

4) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the

detector. Install the detector in its base.

Compatible Signature Series Detectors

Detectors

Compatible Standard Base, SIGA-SB4

Bases Relay Base, SIGA-RB4

Isolator Base, SIGA-IB4

Standard Base, SIGA-SB

Relay Base, SIGA-RB

Isolator Base, SIGA-IB

Construction & High Impact

Finish Engineering Polymer, White


SIGA-TS4

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0


SIGA-TS4 4" Trim Skirt/Ring

DATE: 10/13/99






7 39 3 0 1 6 0 2 8 6 9




DATE: 10/13/99

INSTALLATION SHEET:


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0




SIGA-TS4 4" Jupe De Garniture



DESCRIPTION

La jupe de garniture SIGA-TS4 peut être utilisée avec la

gamme complète Signature (si nécessaire) afin de faire

une finition par dessus la base installée. Cette jupe est

fournit avec la série de bases de 4 pouces.

MODE D'INSTALLATION

1) Se référer à la fiche d'instalation fournie avec la base.

Monter la base sur la boîte électrique.

2) Allgnez les anglets de la jupe de garniture avec les

encoches de la base.

3) Enfoncez a jupe de garniture sur la base jusqu'à ce

qu'elle s'enclenche en place.

4) Se référer à la fiche d'installation fournie avec le

détecteur. Monter le détecteur sur la base.

Détecteurs Détecteurs de la Série Signature

Compatibles

Bases Base standard, SIGA-SB4

Compatibles Base relais, SIGA-RB4

Base d'Isolement, SIGA-IB4

Base standard, SIGA-SB

Base relais, SIGA-RB

Base d'Isolement, SIGA-IB

Construction Polymerè avec résistance

et fini élevée aux impacts

Poids à la livraison 110 g (3.9 oz)

SIGA-TS4

P/N: PP-047550-1856 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2

PRODUCT INFORMATION

DESCRIPTIONThe 4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring, Model SIGA-TSB, is a decorative coverintended for use with Signature Series 4" Bases. The trim skirt/ring coversthe mounting screws on the SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-IB4 toprovide a "finished" appearance to these bases.

The SIGA-TSB may also be used with SIGA-SB, SIGA-RB, and SIGA-IBbases (if necessary) to provide a "finished" appearance.

1) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the base. Mount the baseto the electrical box.

2) Align the tabs on the trim skirt/ring with the notches on the base.

3) Push the trim skirt/ring onto the base until it snaps into position.

4) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the detector. Install thedetector in its base.


SPECIFICATIONS


Compatible Bases

Construction & Finish

Shipping Weight

Signature Series Detectors

Standard Base, SIGA-SB4Relay Base, SIGA-RB4Isolator Base, SIGA-IB4

Standard Base, SIGA-SBRelay Base, SIGA-RBIsolator Base, SIGA-IB, SIGI-IBS

High Impact Engineering Polymer, White

3.9 oz (110 g)

SIGA-TSB

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 1.0


SIGA-TSB4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring

DATE: 01/18/99






7 19 3 0 1 6 0 2 8 0 5

P/N: REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2P-047550-1885


DESCRIPTIONLa jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po), modèle SIGA-TSB,est un couvercle décoratif spécialement conçu pour les bases de 10,16 cm (4po) de la série Signature. Elle permet de dissimuler les vis de montage desbases SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4 et SIGA-IB4 afin de leur donner un aspect finalplus soigné.

Elle peut également être utilisée sur les bases SIGA-SB, SIGA-RB et SIGA-IB,si nécessaire, afin de leur donner un aspect final plus soigné.



Bases compatibles

Construction et fini


Détecteurs de la série Signature

Base standard, SIGA-SB4Base relais, SIGA-RB4Base d’isolement, SIGA-IB4

Base standard, SIGA-SBBase relais, SIGA-RBBase d’isolement, SIGA-IB, SIGI-IBS

Polymère technique avec résistanceélevée aux impacts, blanc

110 g (3,9 oz)

SIGA-TSBJupe de garniture de boîte

de 10,16 cm (4 pouces)

MODE D’INSTALLATION1) Se référer à la fiche d’installation fournie avec la base. Monter la base sur la

boîte électrique.

2) Aligner les onglets de la jupe de garniture avec les encoches de la base.

3) Enfoncez la jupe de garniture sur la base jusqu’à ce qu’elle s’enclen-che enplace.

4) Se référer à la fiche d’installation fournie avec le détecteur. Monter ledétecteur sur la base.




DATE: 01/18/99


FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF: P-047550-1885


NOM DU FICHIER: .CDRP-047550-1885

CREATED BY:CRÉÉ PAR


SIGA-TSB

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The SIGA-UIO2R Universal Input/Output Motherboard provides mounting and wiring terminations for up to two (2) Signature M series modules. In addition, the motherboard features individual inputs/outputs and a common input/output bus. Jumpers, located between the modules, facilitate sharing of common inputs/outputs between the two modules to reduce wiring.

The motherboard conveniently mounts in equipment enclosures or racks. Modules plug into the motherboard, and captive screws fasten them down. All module field wiring goes to terminal blocks on the motherboard, which permits rapid removal and replacement for troubleshooting.

SPECIFICATIONS

Module Capacity Two Signature M series plug-in modules2 2Terminal Capacity 12 AWG (2.5 mm ) to 18 AWG (0.75 mm )

Compatible Boxes GS Building Systems, Corp. listed fire alarm enclosures:

2-WB(X) series2-CAB3-CABRACCR

Clearance Space 1 inch minimum all around the motherboard, 1/2 inch above the Signature M series modules, and in accordance with the National Electrical Code


Storage Temperature -4

Humidity 0 to 93% RH

Dimensions (H x W x D) 4.30 in (10.9 cm) x 5.34 in (13.5 cm) x 0.87 in (2.2 cm) + 2.25 in (5.7 cm) module depth

Weight 0.32 lb (0.15 kg)

series series

series3-RACC series

to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)


Warning!


3 Drill the mounting holes at the marks made in step 1 (mounting hole diameter = 0.125 in or 3.175 mm).

2 Use the motherboard to mark the mounting hole locations.

1 See the specifications to determine which enclosure to mount the motherboard in and how much clearance space to allow it.

4 Mount the motherboard in the cabinet with the screws and washers provided.

#6 Flat Washers

#6-32Self-tapping Screws

SIGA-UIO2R

Mounting space

P1 P2

TB1 TB2

TB7

TB8 TB9

TB15

DATE: 12/22/98

INSTALLATION SHEET:


REVISION LEVEL: 2.0



SIGA-UIO2RUniversal Input/Output Motherboard

See the installation sheets of the individual Signature M series modules for mounting instructions to the motherboard.




! Caution!


Mounting holes0.125 in 3.175 mm diameter

Interior surface of enclosure


Mark the mounting hole locations here.

2

1

Notes

1


1/4 in (6.4 mm)

Strip 1/4 inch from the ends of ALL wires that connect to the terminalblocks of the motherboard.

CAUTION:Exposing more than 1/4 inch of wire may cause a ground fault.Exposing less than 1/4 inch of wire may result in a faulty connection.

WIRING

387349.CDR REV 2.0 Page 2 of 2

Notes

Jumpers may be used to make the inputs/outputs between modules common.

Not all modules use the motherboard terminals for the same functions.

Refer to individual Signature M series installation sheets for jumper settings and wiring information.

Do not mix incompatible signals.

Maximum current is 8 Amps.

Maintain 1/4 in (6.4 mm) separation between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring.

1

2

3

4

5

6

6

Observe the details of supervision and power-limited vs. nonpower-limited circuits, as found in the Signature M series installation sheets.

Maintain a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) spacing between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring or use FPL, FPLP, FPLR, or an equirvalent in accordance with the NEC.

Installations with multiple motherboards or enclosures, which include other wiring, require FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or equivalent NEC-approved wiring for all power-limited wiring.

! Caution!


4321

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

4321

TB15

TB1

TB8

TB7

TB2

TB9


Data Out

Data In

SIGA-UIO2R

Common input/output bus for Signature M seriesmodules

Jumpers connect commoninputs/outputs betweenmodulesModule Input/Output Wiring

1

3

35

5

Module Input/Output Wiring

Power-limited wiring Nonpower-limited wiring

In cabinets that house only one motherboard:

Group all modules with nonpower-limited sources to the right of the motherboard and route their wiring to the right.

Group all modules with power-limited sources to the left of the motherboard and route their wiring to the left.

DATE: 14MAR00

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 2.0



APPROVED BY: J. Burns

PRODUCT INFORMATION

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS PRODUCT DIAGRAM

SPECIFICATIONS

Capacity:

Terminal capacity:

Compatible boxes:

Clearance space:

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Humidity:

Dimensions (H x W x D):

Weight:

Six M series plug-in modules

12 (2.5 sq mm) to 18 (0.75 sq mm)

GS Building Systems, Corporation listed firealarm enclosures:2-WB(X) series3-CAB seriesRACCR series3-RACC seriesMFC-A Cabinet

1 inch minimum all around the UIO6 or UIO6R, 1/2inch above the M series modules, and in accordance with theNational Electrical Code

32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)

-4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

0 to 93% RH

4.30 in (10.9 cm) x 9.56 in (24.28 cm) x0.87 in (2.2 cm) + 2.25 in (5.7 cm) module depth

UIO6 =0.56 lb (0.25 kg), UIO6R = 0.62 lb (0.28 kg)

AWG AWG

The UIO6 and UIO6R Universal Input/Output Motherboards providemounting and wiring terminations for up to six M series modules.

The UIO6 provides two input/output buses common to all modules(TB14 and TB15). The UIO6R provides one input/output bus commonto all modules (TB15) and six individual inputs/outputs (TB8 throughTB13) for further flexibility. Jumpers, located between the modules,facilitate sharing of common inputs/outputs between adjacentmodules to minimize wiring.

Both boards provide six terminal blocks to handle the inputs andoutputs for individual modules installed on the motherboard (TB1through TB6). The Signature Data Circuit (SDC), which providescommunication to all the modules, is connected at a single location(TB7).

The motherboard conveniently mounts into equipment enclosures orracks. Modules plug into the motherboard at any of the six locations,and captive screws fasten them to the motherboard. All module fieldwiring goes to terminal blocks on the motherboard to permit rapidremoval and replacement for troubleshooting.

#6 flatwashers

#6-32self-tappingscrews



UIO6(R)

Mounting holes0.125 in (3.175 mm) diameter

UIO6(R) Mounting Space

Notes

[1] Mark the mounting hole locations here.

2. See the installation sheets of the individual M series modules formounting instructions to the UIO6 or UIO6R.

WARNING: Disconnect power to cabinets before installing orremoving components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury orloss of life.

1. See the specifications given here to determine the correctenclosure and clearance space for a particular motherboard.

2. Use the UIO6 or UIO6R to mark the mounting hole locations.

3. Drill mounting holes.

4. Mount the UIO6 or UIO6R in the cabinet, using the screws andwashers provided.


0.125 in (3.175 mm)

[1]

TB7

4321

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

P1 P2

TB1

TB8JP1A JP2A JP3A JP4A JP5A

JP1B JP2B JP3B JP4B JP5B

TB9 TB10 TB11 TB12 TB13

TB2

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

P3 P4

TB3 TB4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

P5 P6

TB5 TB6

TB15

4321

4321

4321

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

P1 P2

TB1 TB2

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

P3 P4

TB3 TB4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

P5 P6

TB5 TB6

4321

TB7

TB14

TB15

UIO6R

UIO6

SIGA-UIO6(R)Universal Input/Output Motherboard


TB1 through TB6provide moduleinput/output wiring.Refer to individualmodule installationsheet for wiring details.

Module Input/Output Wiring (maximum current is 8 Amps)Refer to individual module installation sheet for wiring details.

Input/output bus 2common to all M seriesmodules (maximumcurrent is 8 Amps)

Jumpers connectcommon inputs andoutputs betweenmodules.

SIGA-UIO6R-LG

TB

8

TB

9

TB

10

TB

11

TB

12

TB

13

TB15

TB

2

TB

3

TB

4

TB

5

TB

6

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

4321

UIO6R


Data Out

Data In

TB

1

TB7



4321

TB1 through TB6provide moduleinput/output wiring.Refer to individualmodule installationsheet for wiring details.



TB144321

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

4321

TB15

UIO6

TB

1

TB

2

TB

3

TB

4

TB

5

TB

6

UIO6

TB7




Data Out

Data In

4321

CAUTION

WIRING DIAGRAM




1/4 in (~6 mm)

P/N: REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2387473

In cabinets that house only one UIO6 or UIO6R motherboard:

• Group all modules with nonpower-limited sources to the right ofthe motherboard and route their wiring to the right

• Group all modules with power-limited sources to the left of themotherboard and route their wiring to the left

• Maintain 1/4 inch separation between power-limited andnonpower-limited wiring, or use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or anequivalent in accordance with the National Electric Code.

Installations with multiple UIO6 or UIO6R motherboards or enclosureswhich include other wiring require FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or equivalentNEC-approved wiring for all power-limited wiring.

Observe the details of supervision and power-limited vs. nonpower-limited circuits, as found on the M series installation sheets.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1726 REV: 3.0SIGA-UM - Universal Class A/B Module 1 / 4

SIGA-UMUniversal Class A/B Module

Product diagram

The SIGA-UM Universal Class A/B Module is a component of theSignature Series. The SIGA-UM is an analog addressable device thatcan connect any one of the following:

• Dual input Class B initiating device circuit (IDC)• Class A or B initiating device circuit (IDC)• Class A or B notification appliance circuit (NAC)• Class A or B circuit for 2-wire smoke detectors and initiating

devices on one circuit• Form C dry contact relay

The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-UM automatically.A custom address can also be assigned to the module via laptopcomputer. No addressing switches are used. Two device addressesare required.



Mounting

The SIGA-UM can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm)deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deepwith a 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWGwire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.

Jumper setup

Jumper JP1 is factory installed on pins 1 and 2 for normal operation. Inorder to operate the SIGA-UM as a Form C dry relay contact to controlexternal appliances (door closers, fans, dampers, etc.), JP1 must bemoved to pins 2 and 3 and personality code 8 must be downloaded tothe module.


The SIGA-UM requires the Signature loop controller. The loopcontroller downloads the personality code which determines how themodule operates. The following personality codes can be downloadedto the SIGA-UM.

Personality code 1: N/O alarm latching (Class B): Configures input1 and/or 2 for Class B normally-open dry contact initiating devices(e.g., pull stations, heat detectors, etc.). When the N/O input contact ofan initiating device is closed, an alarm signal is sent to the loopcontroller and the alarm condition is latched at the module.

Personality code 2: N/O alarm delayed latching (Class B): Same ascode 1 except that contact closure must be maintained forapproximately 16 seconds before an alarm status is generated. Thiscode is only for use with nonretarded waterflow alarm switches.

Personality code 3: N/O active - non-latching (Class B): Contactclosure causes an active instead of an alarm status and does not latchat the module. Code 3 is typically used for monitoring fans, dampers,doors, etc.

Personality code 4: N/O active latching (Class B): Contact closurecauses an active instead of an alarm status which is latched at themodule. Code 4 is typically used for monitoring supervisory and tamperswitches.

Personality code 8: dry contact output: Configures the module as aForm C dry relay contact to control external appliances (door closers,fans, dampers, etc.) or equipment shutdown. Note: Jumper JP1 mustbe moved to pins 2 and 3 for dry contact operation.

Personality code 9: N/O alarm latching (Class A): Configures themodule for connection of Class A normally-open dry contact initiatingdevices (e.g., pull-stations, heat detectors, etc.). When the N/O inputcontact of an initiating device is closed, an alarm signal is sent to theloop controller and the alarm condition is latched at the module.

Personality Code 10: N/O alarm delayed latching (Class A): Sameas code 9 except that contact closure must be maintained forapproximately 16 seconds before an alarm status is generated. Code10 is typically used with waterflow alarm switches.

Personality code 11: N/O active - non-latching (Class A): Same ascode 9 except that contact closure causes an active instead of analarm status, and does not latch at the module. Personality code 11 istypically used for monitoring fans, dampers, doors, etc.

Personality code 12: N/O active - latching (Class A): Same as code9 except that contact closure causes an active instead of an alarmstatus, which is latched at the module. Code 12 is typically used formonitoring supervisory and tamper switches.

Personality code 13: 2-wire smoke - non-verified (Class B):Configures the module for monitoring 2-wire conventional smokedetectors (that do not require alarm verification) and normally-opencontact initiating devices (e.g., pull-stations, heat detectors, etc.) on thesame circuit.

Personality code 14: 2-wire smoke - verified (Class B): Configuresthe module for monitoring 2-wire conventional smoke detectors (thatrequire alarm verification). Normally-open contact initiating devicesmay not be mixed with 2-wire conventional smoke detectors.

Personality code 15: signal output (Class A): Configures themodule for connection of a Class A output notification appliance circuit(NAC). Code 15 is typically used to control bells, speakers, etc.

Personality code 16: signal output (Class B): Configures themodule for connection of a Class B output notification appliance circuit(NAC). Code 16 is typically used to control bells, speakers, etc.

Personality code 20: 2-wire smoke - non-verified (Class A): Sameas personality code 13, except that wiring is Class A.

Personality code 21: 2-wire smoke - verified (Class A): Same aspersonality code 14, except that wiring is Class A.



2. The personality code for this module is factory set to 0. Thismodule will not operate until it is assigned a personality code of 1,2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20, or 21.

3. When using personality code 8, Jumper JP1 must be moved topins 2 and 3. Do not assume relay contacts are in the correctstate until this module is installed and signal power is applied.

4. When using personality code 13 or 14, a UL/ULC Listed 15 KΩEOL resistor must be installed at the last device in the circuit.

P/N: P-047550-1726 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGA-UM - Universal Class A/B Module

5. Dangerous voltages may be present at terminals even whenpower is shut off.

SpecificationsOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcRipple voltage: 2 VacOutput ratings

24 Vdc @ 2 A25 V Audio: 50 W70 V Audio: 35 W

Contact ratings24 Vdc @ 2 A120 Vdc @ 0.5 A

Relay type: Form COperating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)

Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RHStorage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Construction: High impact polymerShipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)Compatible electrical boxes

North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang boxStandard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box with 2-gangcover

UL compatibility ID: 0.0Initiating device circuit (IDC)

Max. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)Max. circuit capacitiance (per channel): 0.1 µFMax. alarm current (per channel): 17 mAOperating voltage range: 16.0 to 24.0 Vdc

Mode of operation Personality code Standby current Activated current EOL resistor

Class B initiating device circuit 1, 2, 3, or 4 396 µA 680 µA 47 kΩ

Form C dry contact relay 8 100 µA 100 µA N/A

Class A initiating device circuit 9, 10, 11, or 12 223 µA 365 µA N/A

2-wire smoke detectors and initiatingdevices

13, 14, 20, or 21 2.0 mA(from 3rd wire)

N/A Class A: 22 kΩClass B: 15 kΩ

First UM module to go into alarm(Class A or B)

N/A N/A 12 mA smoke detector17 mA contact closure

N/A

Each subsequent UM to go into alarm N/A N/A 100 µA (from data line) N/A

Class A or B notification appliancecircuit

15 or 16 223 µA 365 µA Class A: N/AClass B: 47 kΩ

Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-UM is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit;it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled.







Notes

1. A valid personality code MUST be downloaded to the modulethrough programming for the unit to operate.

2. Wire in accordance with the current NFPA 70 National ElectricalCode.

Transient protection

This module requires transient protection for installations in whichelectromechanical bells or horns are connected to the output circuits.

A Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P) must be used to protectthe module's electronic circuitry from the effects of electronic transientscaused by the inductive load of bells or horns.

Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across the terminalsof the bell or horn located electrically closest to the module. Thebipolar transient protector is not polarity sensitive.

Bells and horns must be located a minimum distance of 6 ft (1.83 m)from the module.


1/4 in (~6 mm)



Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1726 REV: 3.0SIGA-UM - Universal Class A/B Module 3 / 4

Wiring diagramsThese notes apply to the wiring diagrams that follow.

[1] For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appropriate technicalreference manual

[2] Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA[3] See Signature Loop Controller installation sheet for wiring specs[4] This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors unless

configured for personality code 13, 14, 20, or 21[5] Maximum 12.5 Ω resistance per wire for Class A configurations[6] Compatible smoke detector. See the control panel installation

manual for type and quantity.[7] SIGA-UM must be installed in the same room as the device it

controls[8] Polarity at terminals 11 and 12 shown in supervisory condition.

Connect as shown in diagram. (Polarity reverses on alarm.)

[9] Power-limited and supervised[10] Supervised and power-limited when connected to power-limited

source. If nonpower-limited, then all power-limited wiring in boxmust use FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable or equivalent per NEC.Power-limited marking must be eliminated.

[11] Power-limited when connected to power limited source. If non-power limited, then all power limited wiring in box must use FPL,FPLR, or FPLP cable or equivalent per NEC. Power-limitedmarking must be eliminated.

[12] A maximum of 15 UM modules per circuit can be configured tosupport 2-wire smoke detectors (personality codes 13, 14, 20,and 21). However, if a Signature Series IM module or SignatureSeries Detector with an Isolator Base (IB) is installed on theSignature Data Circuit, only 7 UM modules may be configured tosupport 2-wire smoke detectors.

[13] Maximum alarm current is 17 mA. Operating voltage range is16.0 to 24.0 Vdc.

Dual input module (personality codes 1, 2, 3, and 4) [4]


[3] [9]

Not used

TB4

TB2


Green LED(Normal)

Not usedFrom Signature

controller or previous device

DATA IN(+)(–)

(+)(–)

Typical initiating device


INPUT 1 INPUT 2


DATA OUT To next device

TB3

TB1

4 3 2 18 7 6 5

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 93-2-1

JP1

Control relay module (personality code 8) [4]

[3] [9]

Not used

TB4

TB2


Green LED(Normal)



DATA IN(+)(–)

(+)(–)


TB3

TB1

4 3 2 18 7 6 5

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 93-2-1

JP1

Wiring on terminals 1 - 4 is power-limited and supervised

Notused Not used

Normallyopen

Normallyclosed Common

[7] [11]JP1

3 2 1

Single input module (personality codes 9, 10, 11, or 12) [4]

[3] [9]

TB4

TB2


Green LED(Normal)



DATA IN(+)(–)

(+)(–)


TB3

TB1

4 3 2 18 7 6 5

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 93-2-1

JP1

Typical initiating device

Style D (Class A)[1] [2] [5] [9] Not used Not used

P/N: P-047550-1726 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGA-UM - Universal Class A/B Module

2-wire smoke detectors and initiating devices (personality codes 13, 14, 20, or 21) [6] [12]

[3] [9]

TB4

TB2


Green LED(Normal)



DATA IN(+)(–)

(+)(–)


TB3

TB1

4 3 2 18 7 6 5

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 93-2-1

JP1

Style D (Class A)[5] [13]


UL/ULC listed 22 k EOL used for Class A only

Ω

IN+

OUT+

[6]UL/ULC listed 15 k EOL for Class B only

Ω

Not used

Smoke detector power (+24 Vdc) from Signature controller or previous device

Typical initiating device (no devices allowed with personality code 14 or 21)

Single output module (personality codes 15 or 16) [4]

TB4

TB2


Green LED(Normal)

TB3

TB1

4 3 2 18 7 6 5

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 93-2-1

JP1

[3] [9]

To next deviceFrom UL/ULC listed

control panel RISER IN (+)(–) DATA OUT

(+)(–)

DATA IN(+)(–)

From Signature controller or previous device

Style Z (Class A)[1] [10]

Style Y (Class B)[8] [10]

Install the bipolar transient protector here

Circuit wired same as diagram below

Not used Not used

UL/ULC listed 47 k EOLused for Class B only

Ω

Typical notification applicance

To next device or EOL resistor supplied with UL/ULC listed control panelRISER OUT

(+)(–)

[10]

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387058P REV: 6.0SIGA-WTM - Waterflow/Tamper Module 1 / 4

SIGA-WTMWaterflow/Tamper Module

Product description

1234

5678

The SIGA-WTM Waterflow/Tamper Module is a component ofthe Signature Series. The SIGA-WTM is an analogaddressable device used to connect Class B normally openwaterflow alarm and supervisory initiating device circuits(IDCs) to a Signature loop controller. Two device addressesare required.

Input channel 1 of the SIGA-WTM is used for waterflow alarmapplications. Input channel 2 is used for supervisoryapplications. This is determined by a personality code that isdownloaded to the module by the loop controller during systemconfiguration.

The loop controller assigns two addresses to the SIGA-WTMautomatically. Custom addresses can also be assigned to themodule via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.



Mounting

The SIGA-WTM can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.


The SIGA-WTM requires the Signature loop controller. Theloop controller downloads the personality code whichdetermines how the module operates. The followingpersonality codes can be downloaded to the SIGA-WTM.









Installation instructionsNote: The SIGA-WTM is shipped from the factory as anassembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts andshould not be disassembled.







Notes



P/N: 387058P REV: 6.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGA-WTM - Waterflow/Tamper Module



1/4 in (~6 mm)





Wiring diagram

(+)

(–)DATA OUT

INPUT 1Personality Code 2

INPUT 2Personality Code 4


Typical N.O. Waterflow Switch



TB2

TB1

Typical N.O.Supervisory/

Tamper SwitchUL/ULC listed

47 k EOLΩ

Green LED(normal)

(+)

(–)


DATA IN

1234

5678

Notes







Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387058P REV: 6.0SIGA-WTM - Waterflow/Tamper Module 3 / 4

SIGA-WTMModule débit d’eau / défaut


1234

5678

Le Module débit d’eau / défaut SIGA-WTM est un composant dusystème série Signature. Le SIGA-WTM est un dispositif analogiqueadressable utilisé pour connecter des circuits de déclenchement(Initiating Device Circuits ou IDC) à contact sec de classe Bnormalement ouverts, d’alarme de débit d’eau et de surveillance, à uncontrôleur de boucle Signature. Deux adresses de dispositif sontnécessaires.

Le canal d’entrée 1 du SIGA-WTM est utilisé pour des applications detype alarme de débit d’eau. Le canal d’entrée 2 sert aux applicationsde type sur-veillance. Le contrôleur de boucle assigneautomatiquement deux adresses au SIGA-WTM ou des adressesparticulières peuvent être assignées au module via ordinateur portatif.Aucun bouton d’adressage n’est utilisé.



Montage

Le SIGA-WTM peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nordsimple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîtecarrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeuravec couvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0,et de 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de0,75 mm carrés sont préférables.


Le SIGA-WTM est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs deboucle Signature. Le contrôleur de boucle télécharge le code depersonnalité déterminant comment le module fonctionne. Les codes depersonnalité suivants peuvent être téléchargés dans le SIGA-WTM.

Code de personnalité 2: verrouillage d’alarme retardé N.O. (classeB): Le code de personnalité 2 fonctionne de la même façon que lecode de person-nalité 1, mais la fermeture du contact doit êtremaintenue pendant environ 16 secondes pour générer un étatd’alarme. Le code de personnalité 2 n’est utilisé qu’avec desinterrupteurs d’alarme de débit d’eau non retardés.








InstallationNote: Le SIGA-WTM est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il necontient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas êtredémonté.







Notes




P/N: 387058P REV: 6.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGA-WTM - Waterflow/Tamper Module

Dénudage des fils

~6 mm 1/4 po ( )





Schéma de câblage

(+)

(–)

SORTIE DES DONNÉES

ENTRÉE 1Code de personnalité 2

ENTRÉE 2Code de personnalité 4


Ω

Contact de débit d’eau N.O


Témoin à DEL rouge (Alarme/Actif)

TB2

TB1

Contact de défaut/ surveillance N.O. Typique


Ω

Témoin àDEL vert(Normal)

(+)

(–)

Du contrôleur de boucle Signature ou du dispositif précédent [3] Au dispositif suivant


1234

5678

Notes







Installation Sheet 10JUN02 P/N: P-047550-1725 REV: 3.0SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station 1 / 4


SIGI-271Break Glass Station

Product description

Description

The Break Glass Station (model SIGI-271) is a component ofthe Signature Series. It is designed for indoor use only. Thesingle input module mounted to the back of the unit supervisesthe station and sends an alarm signal to the loop controllerwhen the switch is closed (i.e., when the glass is broken).

Device addressing

One device address is required. The loop controller assigns anaddress to the SIGI-271 automatically. A custom address canbe assigned to the station via laptop computer. No addressingswitches are used.

Mounting

The SIGI-271 can be mounted in a KAC SR3T-P Surface Boxor a KAC ETT1-P Tray for flush mounting.


The SIGI-271 requires the Signature Loop Controller.

Personality code 1: N/O alarm latching (Class B)

The SIGI-271 is assigned personality code 1 at the factory.This configures the SIGI-271 for Class B operation. When theSIGI-271 is activated, an alarm signal is sent to the loopcontroller and the alarm condition is latched at the station.

WARNING: This device will not operate without electricalpower. As fires frequently cause power interruption, wesuggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fireprotection specialist.

SpecificationsConstruction: High impact plasticOperating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 VdcStandby current: 250 µAActivated current: 400 µASwitch contact: 150 mΩ maximumOperating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RHReplacement breakglass:

271-KG1 (package of 5 inserts)Compatible electrical boxes:

KAC SR3T-P Surface BoxKAC ETT1-P Tray for Flush Mount

Shipping Weight: 26 lb (0.12 kg)

Installation instructionsNotes

• The SIGI-271 is shipped from the factory complete with asingle input module attached. The electronic modulecontains no user-serviceable parts and should not bedisassembled.

• The SIGI-271 is factory assigned personality code 1. Nouser configuration is required.

• Refer to the Signature Loop Controller installation sheetfor wiring specifications.

• All wiring is power-limited and supervised.

To install the station:

1. Loosen the captive screw on the front plate of the stationand remove the front plate. Remove the glass panel frominside the station.


3. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiringdiagram. Attach the module wires to the appropriateelectrical box terminals. (Station wiring is provided withspade lugs.)

4. Write the address assigned to the station on the labelprovided and apply the label to the station. Peel off theremovable serial number label from the station and apply itto the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

5. Using the two machine screws provided, mount the breakglass station back plate to the electrical box.

6. Reinstall the glass panel inside the station and reattachthe front plate to the station using the captive screw on thefront plate.

P/N: P-047550-1725 REV: 3.0 10JUN02 Installation Sheet2 / 4 SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station

Wiring diagrams

RedData in/out (+)

BlackData in (-)

Black and whiteData out (-)

Mounting holes

Rear view



Black wire

Black wire

KAC ETT1-P Tray Wiring

KAC SR3T-P Box Wiring

B/W wire

B/W wire Red wire

Red wire

Data out (+)

Data out (+)

Data out (-)

Data out (-)

See wiringdetail above

Compatible electrical boxKAC SR3T-P surface box shown

Glass panel

Mounting screws

Front plate

Test key opening

Back plate

Installation Sheet 10JUN02 P/N: P-047550-1725 REV: 3.0SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station 3 / 4


SIGI-271Poste Bris de Verre


Description

La station Bris de Verre (modèle SIGI-271) est un composantdu Série Signature pour l'intérieur seulement. Le module à uneseule entrée montée à l’arrière du dispositif surveille le poste ettransmet un signal d’alarme au contrôleur de boucle quandl’interrupteur est fermé (i.e. quand le verre est cassé).


Une adresse de dispositif est nécessaire. Le contrôleur deboucle assigne une adresse au SIGI-271 automatiquement, ouune adresse particulière peut être assignée au poste viaordinateur portatif; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’estutilisé.

Montage

Le SIGI-271 peut être monté dans une boîte surface KACSR3T-P ou un plateau KAC ETT1-P pour un montageencastré.


Le SIGI-271 requiert le contrôleur de boucle Signature.


Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné en usine au SIGI-271,ce qui le configure pour un fonctionnement en Classe B.Lorsque le SIGI-271 est activé, un signal d’alarme est envoyéau contrôleur de boucle et la condition d’alarme est verrouilléeau niveau du poste d’alarme d’incendie.

Avertissement: Ce module ne fonctionne pas sans courantélectrique. Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptionsde courant, nous vous conseillons de consulter le spécialistelocal de protection contre incendies pour mise en place desystèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.

CaractéristiquesConstruction: Plastique avec résistance élevée aux impactsGamme de tensions de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 VccCourant de veille: 250 µACourant de fonctionnement actif: 400 µAContact de l'interrupteur: 150 mΩ maximumGamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 ºC (32 à

120 ºF)Gamme de températures de stockage: 20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 à 93% HRVerre de rupture de remplacement: 271- KG1 (5 ajouts par

paquet)Boîtes électriques compatibles:

Boîte surface KAC SR3T-PPlateau KAC ETT1-P pour montage encastré

Poids à la livraison: 0,12 kg (26 livres)

InstallationNotes

• Le SIGI-271 est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; ilne contient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et nedoit pas être démonté.

• Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné en usine au SIGI-271. Aucune configuration par l’utilisateur n’estnécessaire.

• Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucleSignature pour les spécifications de câblage

• Ensemble du câblage surveillé et à limitation de courant.

Pour installer la station:

1. Desserer la vis imperdable sur la plaque avant du poste etenlever la plaque avant. Enlever le panneau en verre del’intérieur du poste

2. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend nidéfauts de con-nexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de miseà la terre.

3. Faire toutes les connexions indiquées dans le diagrammede câblage. Relier les fils à la borne de la boîte électriqueappropriée. (Des cosses sont fournies pour le câblage duposte.)

4. Écrire l’adresse assignée au poste tirage sur l’étiquettefournie et coller cette étiquette sur le poste tirage. Décollerdu poste tirage l’étiquette de numéro de série et la recollerà l’endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros desérie.

5. Avec les deux vis machine fournies, monter la plaquearrière du poste à rupture de verre à la boîte électrique.

6. Réinstaller le panneau de verre à l’intérieur du poste etresserer la plaque avant au poste en serrant les visimperdables de la plaque avant.

P/N: P-047550-1725 REV: 3.0 10JUN02 Installation Sheet4 / 4 SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station

Schémas de câblage

Rouge (+)Entrée/sortie des données

Noir (-)Entrée des données

Noir et blanc (-)Sortie des données

Trous de montage

Vue arrière


données (-)


données (-)

Fil noir

Fil noir

Plateau de câblage KAC ETT1-P

Fil N/B

Fil N/B Fil rouge

Fil rouge

Sortie desdonnées (+)Sortie desdonnées (-)

Sortie desdonnées (+)Sortie desdonnées (-)

Câblage de la boîte KAC SR3T-P

Voir les détails ducâblage ci-dessus

Boîte électrique compatibleIllustration de la boîte surface KAC SR3T-P

Panneau en verre

Vis de montage

Plaque avant

Ouverture pour

clef d’essai

Plaque arrière

56

34

17

2

DATA OUT (-)


or Previous Device

DATA IN (-)

DATA IN (+)

Term

1 Not Used

45

DATA IN (-)

Not Used

7 Not Used

2 DATA IN/OUT (+)3

Not Used

6 DATA OUT (-)

DescriptionOperating Temperature Range 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)

Operating Humidity Range 0 - 93% RH






Compatible Electrical Boxes North American 1-Gang Box

3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box

4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box

European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing Centers

BESA Box

NOTES:



SIGI-IBS


MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.1 in(27 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

Besa Box

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

NorthAmerican 1-Gang Box

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.5 in(38 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

3-1/2 in or 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38mm) Deep Octagon Box

European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box with 60.3 Fixing Centers

4.4 in (112 mm)

1.75 in(45 mm)

2.0 in(51 mm)

0.8 in(20 mm)

INSTALLATION SHEET


REVISION LEVEL: 3.0


SIGI-IBSDetector Base

DATE: 01/15/99






7 69 3 0 1 6 0 2 7 8 5

P/N: P-047550-1749 REV: 3.0 Page 2 of 4

+

+

_

_

S

S

Isolator Detector Base, SIGI-IBS(shown below)

Isolator Detector Base, SIGI-IBS(shown below as last device)


Control Panel

2 3

NOYES NO

OKOK

JUNCTION BOX

TERMINAL STRIP

FROMPREVIOUS

DEVICE

TONEXT

DEVICE

TOT-TAPPEDDEVICEPROPER METHOD

FOR T-TAPS

Shielded wire is required ONLY in environments with very highelectrical noise.

1.

2 Shields must be continuous and insulated from ground.

3 For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to groundat the last device.

NOTES




56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2




DATE: 01/15/99






Poids à la livraison 91 g (3,2 oz)


Boîtes électriques compatibles Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm(3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm(1,5 po) de profondeur

Boîte octogonale de 10,16 cm(4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur

Boîte européenne simplestandard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de 60,3 mm

Boîte BESA

NOTES: 1) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75

mm (AWG n 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.


° °

° °

2 2 2

2°

SIGI-IBS


P/N: P-047550-1749 REV: 3.0 Page 3 of 4


112 mm (4,4 po)

27 mm (1,1 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

Boîte Besa

112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm (1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)


112 mm (4,4 po)

38 mm (1,5 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) ou de 10,16 cm (4 po)et de 38mm (1,5 po) de profondeur

112 mm (4,4 po)

45 mm (1,75 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)


Entrée des





Borne Description




données (-)

SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE


FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : P-047550-1749

NOM DU FICHIER : P-047550-1749.CDR




Base de détecteurSIGI-IBS

56

34

17

2

P/N: P-047550-1749 REV: 3.0 Page 4 of 4

NONOUI NON

NOTES


+

+

_

_

S

S

2 3

Base de détecteur à isolateur, SIGI-IBS Base de détecteur à isolateur, SIGI-IBS

Isoler le blindage avec Blindage

Panneau de

OKOKMÉTHODE

CORRECTE POUR

VERS LE DISPOSITIF À

VERS LE DISPOSITIF

PROVENANCEDU DISPOSITIF

BARRETTE À BORNES

BOÎTE DE RACCORDEMENT

1. Un fil blindé est requis UNIQUEMENT dans les environnements à interférences électriques élevées.

2 Le blindage doit être continu et isolé de la terre.

3 Câblage de classe B: aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le blindage et la terre au niveau du dernier dispositif du circuit.

56

34

17

2

56

34

17

2




bornes.

Documents

03 Component Installation Manual